ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

Educational Objectives
Bachelor of Electrical and Electronics Engineering curriculum is designed to prepare the
graduates having attitude and knowledge to
࿿࿿࿿࿿Éì⻚࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ê遲猠࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ë頖徲࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ì㋬㳧࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Í㷲⋱࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Î萀礫࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿
Ñ혀俄࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ò䈐寽࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ó侊癗࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ô筦ត࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Õ188 Have successful technical
and professional careers in their chosen fields such as circuit theory, Field theory, control theory
and computational platforms.
࿿࿿࿿࿿Éì⻚࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ê遲猠࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ë頖徲࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ì㋬㳧࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Í㷲⋱࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Î萀礫࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿
Ñ혀俄࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ò䈐寽࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ó侊癗࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ô筦ត࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Õ189 Engross in life long process
of learning to keep themselves abreast of new developments in the
field of Electronics and their applications in power engineering.
Programme Outcomes
The graduates will have the ability to
0 Apply the Mathematical knowledge and the basics of Science and Engineering to solve the
problems pertaining to Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering.
1 Identify and formulate Electrical and Electronics Engineering problems from research literature
and be ability to analyze the problem using first principles of Mathematics and Engineering
Sciences.
2 Come out with solutions for the complex problems and to design system components or process
that fulfill the particular needs taking into account public health and safety and the social, cultural
and environmental issues.
3 Draw well-founded conclusions applying the knowledge acquired from research and research
methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of
information and to arrive at significant conclusion.
4 Form, select and apply relevant techniques, resources and Engineering and IT tools for
Engineering activities like electronic prototyping, modeling and control of systems and also being
conscious of the limitations.
5 Understand the role and responsibility of the Professional Electrical and Electronics Engineer and
to assess societal, health, safety issues based on the reasoning received from the contextual
knowledge.
6 Be aware of the impact of professional Engineering solutions in societal and environmental
contexts and exhibit the knowledge and the need for Sustainable Development.
7 Apply the principles of Professional Ethics to adhere to the norms of the engineering practice and
to discharge ethical responsibilities.
8 Function actively and efficiently as an individual or a member/leader of different teams and
multidisciplinary projects.
9 Communicate efficiently the engineering facts with a wide range of engineering community and
others, to understand and prepare reports and design documents; to make effective presentations
and to frame and follow instructions.
10 Demonstrate the acquisition of the body of engineering knowledge and insight and Management
Principles and to apply them as member / leader in teams and multidisciplinary environments.
11 Recognize the need for self and life-long learning, keeping pace with technological challenges in
the broadest sense.
PEO \PO a b c d e f g h i j k l

1           
2           
1
 NAME OF THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES
SEMESTER
SUBJECT
a b c d e f g h i j k l
THEORY
Communicative English   
Engineering Mathematics - I    
Engineering Physics      
Engineering Chemistry     
Problem Solving and Python      
SEM I Programming
Engineering Graphics  
PRACTICAL
Problem Solving and Python       
Programming Laboratory
Physics and Chemistry Laboratory  
THEORY
Technical English   
Engineering Mathematics - II     
Physics For Electronics Engineering      
Basic Civil and Mechanical  
Engineering
SEM II Circuit Theory      
Environmental Science       
and Engineering
PRACTICALS
Engineering Practices Laboratory      
Electric Circuits Lab       
THEORY
Transforms and Partial Differential    
Equations
Digital Logic Circuits  
SEM III Electromagnetic Theory       

Electrical Machines – I      

2
 Electron Devices and Circuits      
Power Plant Engineering      
PRACTICALS
Electronics Laboratory     
Electrical Machines Laboratory - I     
THEORY
Numerical Methods    
Electrical Machines – II       

Transmission and Distribution       

Measurements and Instrumentation      

Linear Integrated Circuits and    

SEM IV Applications
Control Systems      

PRACTICALS
Electrical Machines Lab II      

Linear and Digital Integrated Circuits      

Laboratory
Technical Seminar   
THEORY
Power System Analysis       

Microprocessors and       
Microcontrollers
Power Electronics      

Digital Signal Processing       

SEM V
Object Oriented Programming    
Open Elective I
PRACTICALS
Control and Instrumentation      
Laboratory
3
 Professional Communication   
Object Oriented Programming    
Laboratory
THEORY
Solid State Drives      

Protection and Switchgear       

Embedded Systems
Professional Elective I
Professional Elective II
SEM VI
PRACTICALS
Power Electronics and Drives      
Laboratory
Microprocessors and      
Microcontrollers Laboratory
Mini Project      

THEORY
High Voltage Engineering       

Power System Operation and       

Control
Renewable Energy Systems       

Open Elective II
SEM VII
Professional Elective III
Professional Elective IV
PRACTICALS
Power System Simulation      
Laboratory
Renewable Energy Systems      
Laboratory
SEM VIII THEORY

Professional Elective V

4
 Professional Elective VI
PRACTICALS
Project Work            

. PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE

NAME OF THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES

SL.NO. SUBJECT
a b c d e f g h i j k l
THEORY
Advanced Control System    
Visual Languages and Applications    
ELECTIVE – I Design of Electrical Apparatus     
Power Systems Stability  
Modern Power Converters     
Intellectual Property Rights   

Principles of Robotics   
Special Electrical Machines     
Power Quality      
ELECTIVE – II
EHVAC Transmission      

Communication Engineering

Disaster Management      
Human Rights    
Operations Research      
Probability and Statistics
ELECTIVE – III Fibre Optics and Laser     
Instrumentation
Foundation Skills in Integrated
Product Development

5
 System Identification and Adaptive    
Control
Computer Architecture   
ELECTIVE – IV Control of Electrical Drives     
VLSI Design     
Power Systems Transients   
Total Quality Management       

Flexible AC Transmission Systems      

Soft Computing Techniques   
Power Systems Dynamics   
SMPS and UPS   
ELECTIVE – V Electric Energy Generation,       
Utilization and Conservation
Professional Ethics in Engineering      
Principals of Management   
Energy Management and Auditing       
Data Structures   
High Voltage Direct Current      
Transmission
ELECTIVE – VI Microcontroller Based System      
Design
Smart Grid      
Biomedical Instrumentation     

Fundamentals of Nano Science

6
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2017
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
I TO VIII SEMESTERS CURRICULA & SYLLABI

SEMESTER I
S.NO.COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS8151 Communicative English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8151 Engineering Mathematics - I BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. CY8151 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
5. GE8151 Problem Solving and ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python Programming
6. GE8152 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
PRAC TICALS
7. GE8161 Problem Solving and ES
Python Programming 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. BS8161 Physics and Chemistry BS 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 31 19 0 12 25

SEMESTER II

S.NO. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

CODE PERIODS
THEO RY
1. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
2. MA8251 Engineering Mathematics - II BS 4 4 0 0 4
3. PH8253 Physics for Electronics BS 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
4. BE8252 Basic Civil and Mechanical ES 4 4 0 0 4
Engineering
5. EE8251 Circuit Theory PC 4 2 2 0 3
6. GE8291 Environmental Science and HS 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
PRAC TICALS
7. GE8261 Engineering Practices ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. EE8261 Electric Circuits Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 30 20 2 8 25

7
 SEMESTER III

S.NO. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

CODE PERIODS
THEO RY
1. MA8353 Transforms and Partial BS 4 0 0 4
Differential Equations 4
2. EE8351 Digital Logic Circuits PC 4 2 2 0 3
3. EE8391 Electromagnetic PC 4 2 2 0 3
Theory
4. EE8301 Electrical Machines - I PC 4 2 2 0 3
5. EC8353 Electron Devices and ES 3 0 0 3
Circuits 3
6. ME8792 Power Plant ES 3 0 0 3
Engineering 3
PRAC TICALS
7. EC8311 Electronics Laboratory ES 4 0 0 4 2
8. EE8311 Electrical Machines PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory - I
TOTAL 30 16 6 8 23
SEMESTER IV

S.NO. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C

CONTACT
CODE PERIODS
THEO RY
1. MA8491 Numerical Methods BS 4 0 0 4
4
2. EE8401 Electrical Machines - II PC 2 2 0 3
4
3. EE8402 Transmission and PC 3 0 0 3
Distribution 3
4. EE8403 Measurements and PC 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation 3
5. EE8451 Linear Integrated PC 3 0 0 3
Circuits and 3
Applications
6. IC8451 Control Systems PC 3 2 0 4
5
PRACT ICALS
7. EE8411 Electrical Machines PC 0 0 4 2
Laboratory - II 4
8. EE8461 Linear and Digital PC 0 0 4 2
4
Integrated Circuits
Laboratory
9. EE8412 Technical Seminar EEC 0 0 2 1
2
TOTAL 18 4 10 25
32

8
 SEMESTER V

S.NO. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

CODE PERIODS
3
THEO RY
1. EE8501 Power System PC 3 0 0 3
Analysis 3
2. EE8551 Microprocessors and PC 3 0 0 3
Microcontrollers 3
3. EE8552 Power Electronics PC 3 0 0 3
4. EE8591 Digital Signal PC 4 2 2 0 3
Processing 3
5. CS8392 Object Oriented ES 3 0 0 3
Programming
3
6. Open Elective I* OE 3 0 0 3
PRAC TICALS 0
7. EE8511 Control and PC 0 4 2
Instrumentation 4
Laboratory 0
8. HS8581 Professional 0 2 1
Communication EEC 2
0
9. CS8383 Object Oriented ES 4 0 4 2
Programming
Laboratory 17
TOTAL 29 2 10 23
SEMESTER VI

S.NO.COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. EE8601 Solid State Drives PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. EE8602 Protection and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Switchgear
3. EE8691 Embedded Systems ES 3 3 0 0 3
4. Professional Elective I PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. Professional Elective II PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACT ICALS
6. EE8661 Power Electronics and PC 0 0 4 2
Drives Laboratory 4
7. EE8681 Microprocessors and PC 0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers 4
Laboratory
8. EE8611 Mini Project EEC 4 0 0 4 2

TOTAL 27 15 0 12 21

9
 SEMESTER VII

S.NO. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

CODE PERIODS
THEO RY
1. EE8701 High Voltage PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
2. EE8702 Power System PC 3
3 0 0 3
Operation and Control 3
3. EE8703 Renewable Energy PC 3 0 0 3
Systems 3
4. Open Elective II* OE 3 0 0 3
5. Professional PE 3 3 0 0 3
Elective III 3
6. Professional PE 3 0 0 3
Elective IV 4
PRACT ICALS
7. EE8711 Power System PC 0 0 4 2
Simulation Laboratory 4
8. EE8712 Renewable Energy PC 0 0 4 2
Systems Laboratory 26

TOTAL 18 0 8 22

SEMESTER VIII

S.NO. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEG CONTACT L T P C

CODE ORY PERIODS
THEO RY
1. Professional Elective V PE 3 3 0 0 3

2. Professional Elective VI PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACT ICALS
3. EE8811 Project Work EEC 20 0 0 20 10

TOTAL 26 6 0 20 16

TOTAL NO. OF CREDITS: 180

*Course from the curriculum of other UG Programmes.

10
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE –I ( VI SEMESTER)
S.NO. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE PERIODS
1. IC8651 Advanced Control System PE 4 2 2 0 3
2. EE8001 Visual Languages and PE 3 3 0 0 3
Applications
3. EE8002 Design of Electrical PE 3 3 0 0 3
Apparatus
4. EE8003 Power Systems Stability PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. EE8004 Modern Power Converters PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. GE8075 Intellectual Property Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II ( VI SEMESTER)

1. RO8591 Principles of Robotics PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. EE8005 Special Electrical Machines PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. EE8006 Power Quality PE 3 3 0 0 3

4. EE8007 EHVAC Transmission PE 3 3 0 0 3

5. EC8395 Communication Engineering PE 3 3 0 0 3

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – III ( VII SEMESTER)

1. GE8071 Disaster Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
2. GE8074 Human Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
3. MG8491 Operations Research PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. MA8391 Probability and Statistics PE 4 4 0 0 4
5. EI8075 Fibre Optics and Laser PE 3 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation
Foundation Skills in PE 3 3 0 0 3
6. GE8072 Integrated Product
Development

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – IV ( VII SEMESTER)

System Identification and PE 3 3 0 0 3 Adaptive Control
0 EE8008

1 CS8491 Computer Architecture PE 3 3 0 0 3

2 EE8009 Control of Electrical Drives PE 3 3 0 0 3

3 EC8095 VLSI Design PE 3 3 0 0 3

4 EE8010 Power Systems Transients PE 3 3 0 0 3

5 GE8077 Total Quality Management PE 3 3 0 0 3

11
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – V ( VIII SEMESTER)
1. EE8011 Flexible AC Transmission PE 3 3 0 0 3
Systems

2. EE8012 Soft Computing Techniques PE 3 3 0 0 3

3. EE8013 Power Systems Dynamics PE 3 3 0 0 3

4. EE8014 SMPS and UPS PE 3 3 0 5888 3
5. EE8015 Electric Energy Generation, PE 3 3 0 23 3
Utilization and Conservation
6. GE8076 Professional Ethics in PE 3 3 0 5888 3
Engineering
7. MG8591 Principles of Management PE 3 3 0 23 3
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – VI ( VIII SEMESTER)

1. EE8016 Energy Management and PE 3 3 0 0 3

Auditing
2. CS8391 Data Structures PE 3 3 0 5888 3
3. EE8017 High Voltage Direct Current PE 3 3 0 23 3
Transmission
4. EE8018 Microcontroller Based System PE 3 3 0 0 3
Design
5. EE8019 Smart Grid PE 3 3 0 5888 3
6. EI8073 Biomedical Instrumentation PE 3 3 0 뜀ǰᜀĀᜀĀᜀ
7. GE8073 Fundamentals of Nano PE 3 3 0 ĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀ
Science ᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀ∀Ġ
ᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀ
ĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀ
ᜀ256 3
0 3

*Professional Electives are grouped according to elective number as was done previously.
12
 HUMANITIES AND SOCIALSCIENCES (HS)

S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CONTACT L T P C

CODE CATEGORY PERIODS
1. HS8151 Communicative HS 4 4 0 0 4
English
2. HS8251 Technical English HS 4 4 0 0 4
3. GE8291 Environmental HS 3 0 0 3
Science and 3
Engineering

BASIC SCIENCES (BS)

S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

CODE PERIODS
1. MA8151 Engineering BS 4 4 0 0 4
Mathematics I
2. PH8151 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
3. CY8151 Engineering BS 3 3 0 0 3
Chemistry
4. BS8161 Physics and BS
Chemistry 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
5. MA8251 Engineering BS 4 0 0 4
Mathematics II 4
6. PH8253 Physics For BS
Electronics 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
7. MA8353 Transforms and BS
Partial Differential 4 4 0 0 4
Equations
8. MA8491 Numerical Methods BS 4 4 0 0 4
ENGINEERING SCIENCES (ES)

S.NO COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

CODE PERIODS
1. GE8151 Problem Solving and ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python programming
2. GE8152 Engineering ES 6 2 0 4 4
Graphics
3. GE8161 Problem Solving and ES 0 0 4 2
13
 Python programming
Laboratory 4

4. BE8252 Basic Civil and ES

Mechanical 4 4 0 0 4
Engineering
5. GE8261 Engineering ES 4
0 0 4 2
Practices Laboratory
6. EC8353 Electron Devices ES 3
3 0 0 3
and Circuits
7. ME8792 Power Plant ES 3
3 0 0 3
Engineering
8. EC8311 Electronics ES 4
0 0 4 2
Laboratory
9. CS8392 Object Oriented ES 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
10. CS8383 Object Oriented ES
Programming 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
11. EE8691 Embedded Systems ES 3 3 0 0 3
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)

S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

CODE PERIODS 2
1. EE8251 Circuit Theory PC 4 2 0 3
2. EE8261 Electric Circuits PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
3. EE8351 Digital Logic PC 4 2 2 0 3
Circuits
4. EE8391 Electromagnetic PC 4 2 2 0 3
Theory
5. EE8301 Electrical PC 4 2 2 0 3
Machines - I
6. EE8311 Electrical PC 0 0 4 2
Machines 4
Laboratory - I
7. EE8401 Electrical PC 4 2 2 0 3
Machines - II
8. EE8402 Transmission and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Distribution
9. EE8403 Measurements and PC 3 0 0 3
3
Instrumentation
3 0 0 3
10. EE8451 Linear Integrated PC
Circuits and 3
3
Applications
2 0 4
11. IC8451 Control Systems PC 5
0 0 4 2
12. EE8411 Electrical Machines PC 4
Laboratory II
14
 13. EE8461 Linear and Digital PC 4 0 0 4 2
Integrated Circuits
Laboratory
14. EE8501 Power System PC 3 3 0 0 3
Analysis
15. EE8551 Microprocessors PC 3 3 0 0 3
and
Microcontrollers
16. EE8552 Power Electronics PC 3 3 0 0 3
17. EE8591 Digital Signal PC 4 2 2 0 3
Processing
18. EE8511 Control and PC
Instrumentation 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
19. EE8601 Solid State Drives PC 3 3 0 0 3
20. EE8602 Protection and PC 3 3 0 0 3
Switchgear
21. EE8661 Power Electronics PC
and Drives 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
22. EE8681 Microprocessors PC
and 4 0 0 4 2
Microcontrollers
Laboratory
23. EE8701 High Voltage PC 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
24. EE8702 Power System PC 3 3 0 0 3
Operation and
Control
25. EE8703 Renewable Energy PC 3 3 0 0 3
Systems
26. EE8711 Power System PC 4 0 0 4 2
Simulation
Laboratory
27. EE8712 Renewable Energy PC 4 0 0 4 2
Systems
Laboratory
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EEC)

S.No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

CODE PERIODS
1. EE8412 Technical seminar EEC 2 0 0 2 1

2. HS8581 Professional EEC 2 0 0 2 1

Communication
3. EE8611 Mini Project EEC 4 0 0 4 2

4. EE8811 Project work EEC 20 0 0 20 10

15
S.NO. SUBJECT CREDITS AS PER SEMESTER CREDITS SUM
AREA TOTAL MAR
I II III IV V VI VII VIII Y

1. HS 4 7 - - - - - 11
2. BS 12 7 4 4 - - - 27
3. ES 9 6 8 - 5 3 - 31
4. PC - 5 11 20 14 10 13 - 73
5. PE 6 6 6 18
6. OE 3 - 3 6
7. EEC 1 1 2 10 14
Total 25 25 23 25 23 21 22 16 180
Non Credit / - - - - - - - - 0
Mandatory

16
HS8151 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
0 To develop the basic reading and writing skills of first year engineering and technology students.
1 To help learners develop their listening skills, which will, enable them listen to lectures and
comprehend them by asking questions; seeking clarifications.
2 To help learners develop their speaking skills and speak fluently in real contexts.
3 To help learners develop vocabulary of a general kind by developing their reading skills

UNIT I SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY& FRIENDS 12

Reading- short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting- Writing-
completing sentences- - developing hints. Listening- short texts- short formal and informal
conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information- Language
development- Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of speech.
Vocabulary development-- prefixes- suffixes- articles.- count/ uncount nouns.

UNIT II GENERAL READING AND FREE WRITING 12

Reading - comprehension-pre-reading-post reading- comprehension questions (multiple choice
questions and /or short questions/ open-ended questions)-inductive reading- short narratives and
descriptions from newspapers including dialogues and conversations (also used as short Listening
texts)- register- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free writing, short narrative
descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening- telephonic conversations.
Speaking – sharing information of a personal kind—greeting – taking leave- Language development
– prepositions, conjunctions Vocabulary development- guessing meanings of words in context.

UNIT IIIGRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12

Reading- short texts and longer passages (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure- use
of reference words and discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening – listening to
longer texts and filling up the table- product description- narratives from different sources. Speaking-
asking about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language development- degrees of
comparison- pronouns- direct vs indirect questions- Vocabulary development – single word
substitutes- adverbs.

UNIT IV READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 12

Reading- comprehension-reading longer texts- reading different types of texts- magazines Writing-
letter writing, informal or personal letters-e-mails-conventions of personal email- Listening- listening
to dialogues or conversations and completing exercises based on them. Speaking- speaking about
oneself- speaking about one’s friend- Language development- Tenses- simple present-simple past-
present continuous and past continuous- Vocabulary development- synonyms-antonyms- phrasal
verbs

17
UNIT V EXTENDED WRITING 12
Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing- brainstorming -writing short essays – developing an
outline- identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to talks-
conversations- Speaking – participating in conversations- short group conversations-Language
development-modal verbs- present/ past perfect tense - Vocabulary development-collocations-fixed
and semi-fixed expressions

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
0 Read articles of a general kind in magazines and newspapers.
1 Participate effectively in informal conversations; introduce themselves and their friends and
express opinions in English.
2 Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
3 Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.

TEXT BOOKS:
0 Board of Editors. Using English A Coursebook for Undergarduate Engineers and Technologists.
Orient BlackSwan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
1 Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.

REFERENCES
0 Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York:
Rutledge,2011.
1 Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively : Developing Speaking Skillsfor
BusinessEnglish. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
2 Dutt P. Kiranmai and RajeevanGeeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books:
2013
3 Means,L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
CengageLearning ,USA: 2007
4 Redston, Chris &Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student’s Book&
Workbook) Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005

18
 MA8151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - I
L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES :

0 The goal of this course is to achieve conceptual understanding and to retain the best traditions of
traditional calculus. The syllabus is designed to provide the basic tools of calculus mainly for the
purpose of modelling the engineering problems mathematically and obtaining solutions. This is a
foundation course which mainly deals with topics such as single variable and multivariable
calculus and plays an important role in the understanding of science, engineering, economics and
computer science, among other disciplines.

UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules -
Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.

UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change of
variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions of two
variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables – Lagrange’s method of undetermined
multipliers.

UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12

Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial fraction,
Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals.

UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double and
triple integrals.

UNIT V DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of parameters
– Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous linear differential
equations with constant coefficients - Method of undetermined coefficients.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :

After completing this course, students should demonstrate competency in the following skills:

0 Use both the limit definition and rules of differentiation to differentiate functions.
1 Apply differentiation to solve maxima and minima problems.

19
 23 Evaluate integrals both by using Riemann sums and by using the Fundamental Theorem of
Calculus.
24 Apply integration to compute multiple integrals, area, volume, integrals in polar coordinates, in
addition to change of order and change of variables.
25 Evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution, partial fractions and
integration by parts.
26 Determine convergence/divergence of improper integrals and evaluate convergent improper
integrals.
27 Apply various techniques in solving differential equations.

TEXT BOOKS :

23 Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition,
2014.
24 James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7 th Edition, New Delhi,
2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7(Tangents problems only), 2.8, 3.1 to 3.6,
3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1(Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change theorem), 5.5, 7.1 -
7.4 and 7.8].

REFERENCES :

23 Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.

24 Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa Publications, New
Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. Narayanan, S. and Manicavachagom Pillai, T. K., “Calculus" Volume I and II, S. Viswanathan
Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2007.
5888 Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
5889 Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, "Thomas Calculus", 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.

PH8151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
23 To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various
streams of Engineering and Technology.

UNIT I PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9

Elasticity – Stress-strain diagram and its uses - factors affecting elastic modulus and tensile strength
– torsional stress and deformations – twisting couple - torsion pendulum: theory and experiment -
bending of beams - bending moment – cantilever: theory and experiment – uniform and non-uniform
bending: theory and experiment - I-shaped girders - stress due to bending in beams.

20
UNIT II WAVES AND FIBER OPTICS 9
Oscillatory motion – forced and damped oscillations: differential equation and its solution – plane
progressive waves – wave equation. Lasers : population of energy levels, Einstein’s A and B
coefficients derivation – resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) – Semiconductor lasers:
homojunction and heterojunction – Fiber optics: principle, numerical aperture and acceptance angle -
types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – losses associated with optical fibers - fibre
optic sensors: pressure and displacement.

UNIT III THERMAL PHYSICS 9

Transfer of heat energy – thermal expansion of solids and liquids – expansion joints - bimetallic strips
- thermal conduction, convection and radiation – heat conductions in solids – thermal conductivity -
Forbe’s and Lee’s disc method: theory and experiment - conduction through compound media (series
and parallel) – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers, refrigerators, ovens and solar water
heaters.

UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9

Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Compton effect: theory and experimental
verification – wave particle duality – electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its physical
significance – Schrödinger’s wave equation – time independent and time dependent equations –
particle in a one-dimensional rigid box – tunnelling (qualitative) - scanning tunnelling microscope.

UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9

Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell, crystal systems,
Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-planar distances -
coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and diamond structures - crystal
imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger vectors, stacking faults – role of imperfections in
plastic deformation - growth of single crystals: solution and melt growth techniques.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
23 the students will gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its applications,
24 the students will acquire knowledge on the concepts of waves and optical devices and their
applications in fibre optics,
25 the students will have adequate knowledge on the concepts of thermal properties of materials
and their applications in expansion joints and heat exchangers,
26 the students will get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory and its
applications in tunneling microscopes, and
27 the students will understand the basics of crystals, their structures and different crystal growth
techniques.

TEXT BOOKS:
5888 Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. “Engineering Physics”. Oxford University Press, 2015.
5889 Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. “Engineering Physics”. Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
5890 Pandey, B.K. & Chaturvedi, S. “Engineering Physics”. Cengage Learning India, 2012.

REFERENCES:
23 Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. “Principles of Physics”. Wiley, 2015.
24 Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”. Cengage Learning,
2010.
21
23 Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics’.
W.H.Freeman, 2007.

CY8151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LTPC

OBJECTIVES: 3003

23 To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and water
treatment techniques.
24 To develop an understanding of the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications to single and
two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance of alloys.
25 Preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.
26 Types of fuels, calorific value calculations, manufacture of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels.
27 Principles and generation of energy in batteries, nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind mills and fuel
cells.

UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9

Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units – estimation of hardness of water by
EDTA – numerical problems – boiler troubles (scale and sludge) – treatment of boiler feed water –
Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) external treatment
– Ion exchange process, zeolite process – desalination of brackish water - Reverse Osmosis.

UNIT II SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9

Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from solutions
– adsorption isotherms – Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir’s adsorption isotherm – contact
theory – kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir - applications of adsorption
on pollution abatement.
Catalysis: Catalyst – types of catalysis – criteria – autocatalysis – catalytic poisoning and catalytic
promoters - acid base catalysis – applications (catalytic convertor) – enzyme catalysis– Michaelis –
Menten equation.

UNIT III ALLOYS AND PHASE RULE 9

Alloys: Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys - significance of alloying, functions and effect of
alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel. Phase rule:
Introduction, definition of terms with examples, one component system -water system - reduced
phase rule - thermal analysis and cooling curves - two component systems - lead-silver system -
Pattinson process.

UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels: Introduction - classification of fuels - coal - analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) -
carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method) - petroleum - manufacture
of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) - knocking - octane number - diesel oil - cetane number - natural
gas - compressed natural gas (CNG) - liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction - calorific value - higher and lower calorific values- theoretical
calculation of calorific value - ignition temperature - spontaneous ignition temperature - explosive
range - flue gas analysis (ORSAT Method).

22
UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Nuclear fission - controlled nuclear fission - nuclear fusion - differences between nuclear fission and
fusion - nuclear chain reactions - nuclear energy - light water nuclear power plant - breeder reactor -
solar energy conversion - solar cells - wind energy. Batteries, fuel cells and supercapacitors: Types of
batteries – primary battery (dry cell) secondary battery (lead acid battery, lithium-ion-battery) fuel cells
– H2-O2 fuel cell.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 The knowledge gained on engineering materials, fuels, energy sources and water treatment
techniques will facilitate better understanding of engineering processes and applications for
further learning.

TEXT BOOKS:

䌀࿿ᣰ脀쀀！뼀 4096뼀  S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”,

S. Chand & Company LTD, New Delhi, 2015

䌀࿿ᣰ脀쀀！뼀 4097뼀  P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai

Publishing Company (P) LTD, New Delhi, 2015

䌀࿿ᣰ脀쀀！뼀 4098뼀  S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”,

Wiley India PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2013.

REFERENCES:
༃࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༄࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༅࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༆࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༇࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༈࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༉࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��༈࿿D࿿ጋ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༉࿿D࿿ጌ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༊࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿་࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༌࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿།࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༎࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༏࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༐࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༑࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༒࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༓࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༔࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༕࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༖࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༗࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༙࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༚࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༛࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༜࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༝࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༞࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༟࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༠࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༡࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༢࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༣࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༤࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༥࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༦࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༧࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༨࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༩࿿D࿿࿿ ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༪࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༫࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༬࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༭࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༮࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༯࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༰࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༱࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༲࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༳࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༴࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༵࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༶࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༷࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༸࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༹༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༺࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༻࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༼࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༽࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༾࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༿࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཀ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཁ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
ག࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿གྷ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ང࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཅ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
ཆ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཇ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿཈࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཉ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
ཊ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཋ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཌ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཌྷ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
ཎ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཏ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཐ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ད࿿P࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿
དྷ࿿P࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿ན࿿P࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿པ࿿P࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿ཕ࿿P࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿བ࿿P࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿བྷ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿མ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཙ࿿D࿿࿿࿿
C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཚ࿿D࿿፝࿿ ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཛ࿿D࿿፝࿿ ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཛྷ࿿D࿿፝࿿ ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཝ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཞ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཟ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿འ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཡ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ར࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ལ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཤ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཥ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ས࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཧ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཨ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཀྵ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཪ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཫ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཬ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ི༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿ ི D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ུ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿ ུ D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿ྲྀ D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿ ཱྲྀ D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ླྀ࿿ྲྀ D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ླྀ࿿ ཱྲྀ D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ེ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཻ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ོ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཽ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ཾ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཿ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿ ྲྀ D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྂ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྃ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿྄༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿྅࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘྆࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘྇࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྈ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྉ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ྊ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྋ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྍ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ྍ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྍ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྐ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྑ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྒ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྒ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྔ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྕ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྖ࿿D࿿࿿࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྗ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྙ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྚ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྛ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྜ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྜ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭰ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྞ࿿D࿿Ꭱ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྟ࿿D࿿Ꭲ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྠ࿿D࿿Ꭳ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྡ࿿D࿿Ꭴ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྡ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭵ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྣ࿿D࿿Ꭶ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྤ࿿D࿿Ꭷ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྥ࿿D࿿Ꭸ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྦ࿿D࿿Ꭹ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྦ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭺ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྨ࿿D࿿Ꭻ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྩ࿿D࿿Ꭼ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྪ࿿D࿿Ꭽ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྫ࿿D࿿Ꭾ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྫ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭿ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྭ࿿D࿿Ꮀ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྮ࿿D࿿Ꮁ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྯ࿿D࿿Ꮂ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྰ࿿D࿿Ꮃ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྱ࿿D࿿Ꮄ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿D࿿Ꮅ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ླྀ࿿D࿿Ꮆ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྴ࿿D࿿Ꮇ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྵ࿿D࿿Ꮈ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྶ࿿D࿿Ꮉ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྒྷ࿿D࿿Ꮊ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྸ࿿D࿿Ꮋ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྐ࿿ ྵ D࿿Ꮌ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྺ࿿D࿿Ꮍ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྻ࿿D࿿Ꮎ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྼ࿿D࿿Ꮏ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮐ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿྾࿿D࿿Ꮑ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿྿࿿D࿿Ꮒ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿀࿿D࿿Ꮓ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿁࿿D࿿Ꮔ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿࿂࿿D࿿Ꮕ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿃࿿D࿿Ꮖ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿄࿿D࿿Ꮗ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿅࿿D࿿Ꮘ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘࿆࿿D࿿Ꮙ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿇࿿D࿿Ꮚ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿈࿿D࿿Ꮛ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿉࿿D࿿Ꮜ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿊࿿D࿿Ꮝ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿋࿿D࿿Ꮞ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿌࿿D࿿Ꮟ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮠ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿎࿿D࿿Ꮡ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿏࿿D࿿Ꮢ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿐࿿D࿿Ꮣ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿑࿿D࿿Ꮤ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿒࿿D࿿Ꮥ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿓࿿D࿿Ꮦ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿔࿿D࿿Ꮧ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿕࿿D࿿Ꮨ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿖࿿D࿿Ꮩ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿗࿿D࿿Ꮪ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿘࿿D࿿Ꮫ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮬ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮭ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮮ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮯ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮰ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮱ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮲ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮳ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿Dł࿿Ꮴ࿿C࿿ǀ��Nj
Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2014.
༃࿿D࿿ጆ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༄࿿D࿿ጇ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༅࿿D࿿ገ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༆࿿D࿿ጉ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༇࿿D࿿ጊ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༈࿿D࿿ጋ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༉࿿D࿿ጌ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��༈࿿D࿿ጋ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༉࿿D࿿ጌ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༊࿿D࿿ግ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿་࿿D࿿ጎ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༌࿿D࿿ጏ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿།࿿D࿿ጐ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༎࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༏࿿D࿿ጒ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༐࿿D࿿ጓ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༑࿿D࿿ጔ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༒࿿D࿿ጕ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༓࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༔࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༕࿿D࿿ጘ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༖࿿D࿿ጙ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༗࿿D࿿ጚ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༘࿿D࿿ጛ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༙࿿D࿿ጜ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༚࿿D࿿ጝ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༛࿿D࿿ጞ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༜࿿D࿿ጟ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༝࿿D࿿ጠ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༞࿿D࿿ጡ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༟࿿D࿿ጢ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༠࿿D࿿ጣ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༡࿿D࿿ጤ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༢࿿D࿿ጥ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༣࿿D࿿ጦ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༤࿿D࿿ጧ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༥࿿D࿿ጨ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༦࿿D࿿ጩ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༧࿿D࿿ጪ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༨࿿D࿿ጫ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༩࿿D࿿ጬ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༪࿿D࿿ጭ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༫࿿D࿿ጮ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༬࿿D࿿ጯ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༭࿿D࿿ጰ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༮࿿D࿿ጱ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༯࿿D࿿ጲ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༰࿿D࿿ጳ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༱࿿D࿿ጴ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༲࿿D࿿ጵ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༳࿿D࿿ጶ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༴࿿D࿿ጷ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༵࿿D࿿ጸ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༶࿿D࿿ጹ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༷࿿D࿿ጺ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༸࿿D࿿ጻ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༹༘࿿D࿿ጼ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༺࿿D࿿ጽ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༻࿿D࿿ጾ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༼࿿D࿿ጿ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༽࿿D࿿ፀ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༾࿿D࿿ፁ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༿࿿D࿿ፂ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཀ࿿D࿿ፃ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཁ࿿D࿿ፄ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
ག࿿D࿿ፅ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿གྷ࿿D࿿ፆ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ང࿿D࿿ፇ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཅ࿿D࿿ፈ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
ཆ࿿D࿿ፉ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཇ࿿D࿿ፊ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿཈࿿D࿿ፋ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཉ࿿D࿿ፌ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
ཊ࿿D࿿ፍ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཋ࿿D࿿ፎ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཌ࿿D࿿ፏ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཌྷ࿿D࿿ፐ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
ཎ࿿D࿿ፑ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཏ࿿D࿿ፒ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཐ࿿D࿿ፓ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ད࿿P࿿ፔ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿
དྷ࿿P࿿ፕ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿ན࿿P࿿ፖ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿པ࿿P࿿ፗ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿ཕ࿿P࿿ፘ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿བ࿿P࿿ፙ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿བྷ࿿D࿿ፚ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿མ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཙ࿿D࿿࿿࿿
C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཚ࿿D࿿࿿ ፝ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཛ࿿D࿿࿿ ፞ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཛྷ࿿D࿿࿿ ፟ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཝ࿿D࿿፠࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཞ࿿D࿿፡࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཟ࿿D࿿።࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿འ࿿D࿿፣࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཡ࿿D࿿፤࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ར࿿D࿿፥࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ལ࿿D࿿፦࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཤ࿿D࿿፧࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཥ࿿D࿿፨࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ས࿿D࿿፩࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཧ࿿D࿿፪࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཨ࿿D࿿፫࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཀྵ࿿D࿿፬࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཪ࿿D࿿፭࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཫ࿿D࿿፮࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཬ࿿D࿿፯࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿፰࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿፱࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿፲࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿፳࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿D࿿፴࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ི༘࿿D࿿፵࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿ ི D࿿፶࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ུ༘࿿D࿿፷࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿ ུ D࿿፸࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿ྲྀ D࿿፹࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿ ཱྲྀ D࿿፺࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ླྀ࿿ྲྀ D࿿፻࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ླྀ࿿ ཱྲྀ D࿿፼࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ེ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཻ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ོ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཽ༘࿿D࿿ᎀ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ཾ࿿D࿿ᎁ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཿ࿿D࿿ᎂ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿D࿿ᎃ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿ ྲྀ D࿿ᎄ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྂ࿿D࿿ᎅ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྃ࿿D࿿ᎆ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿྄༘࿿D࿿ᎇ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿྅࿿D࿿ᎈ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘྆࿿D࿿ᎉ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘྇࿿D࿿ᎊ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྈ࿿D࿿ᎋ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྉ࿿D࿿ᎌ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ྊ࿿D࿿ᎍ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྋ࿿D࿿ᎎ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿ᎏ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྍ࿿D࿿᎐࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ྍ࿿D࿿᎑࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྍ࿿D࿿᎒࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྐ࿿D࿿᎓࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྑ࿿D࿿᎔࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྒ࿿D࿿᎕࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྒ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿᎖࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྔ࿿D࿿᎗࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྕ࿿D࿿᎘࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྖ࿿D࿿᎙࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྗ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྙ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྚ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྛ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྜ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྜ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭰ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྞ࿿D࿿Ꭱ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྟ࿿D࿿Ꭲ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྠ࿿D࿿Ꭳ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྡ࿿D࿿Ꭴ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྡ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭵ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྣ࿿D࿿Ꭶ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྤ࿿D࿿Ꭷ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྥ࿿D࿿Ꭸ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྦ࿿D࿿Ꭹ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྦ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭺ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྨ࿿D࿿Ꭻ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྩ࿿D࿿Ꭼ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྪ࿿D࿿Ꭽ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྫ࿿D࿿Ꭾ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྫ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭿ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྭ࿿D࿿Ꮀ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྮ࿿D࿿Ꮁ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྯ࿿D࿿Ꮂ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྰ࿿D࿿Ꮃ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྱ࿿D࿿Ꮄ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿D࿿Ꮅ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ླྀ࿿D࿿Ꮆ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྴ࿿D࿿Ꮇ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྵ࿿D࿿Ꮈ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྶ࿿D࿿Ꮉ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྒྷ࿿D࿿Ꮊ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྸ࿿D࿿Ꮋ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྐ࿿ ྵ D࿿Ꮌ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿༘ྺ࿿D࿿Ꮍ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྻ࿿D࿿Ꮎ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྼ࿿D࿿Ꮏ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮐ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿྾࿿D࿿Ꮑ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿྿࿿D࿿Ꮒ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿀࿿D࿿Ꮓ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿁࿿D࿿Ꮔ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿࿂࿿D࿿Ꮕ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿃࿿D࿿Ꮖ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿄࿿D࿿Ꮗ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿅࿿D࿿Ꮘ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘࿆࿿D࿿Ꮙ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿇࿿D࿿Ꮚ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿈࿿D࿿Ꮛ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿉࿿D࿿Ꮜ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿊࿿D࿿Ꮝ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿋࿿D࿿Ꮞ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿌࿿D࿿Ꮟ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮠ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿎࿿D࿿Ꮡ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿏࿿D࿿Ꮢ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿐࿿D࿿Ꮣ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿑࿿D࿿Ꮤ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿒࿿D࿿Ꮥ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿓࿿D࿿Ꮦ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿔࿿D࿿Ꮧ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿕࿿D࿿Ꮨ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿖࿿D࿿Ꮩ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿗࿿D࿿Ꮪ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿘࿿D࿿Ꮫ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮬ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮭ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮮ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮯ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮰ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮱ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮲ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮳ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿Dł࿿Ꮴ࿿C࿿ǀ��Nj
Prasanta Rath, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cengage Learning India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2015.
༃࿿D࿿ጆ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༄࿿D࿿ጇ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༅࿿D࿿ገ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༆࿿D࿿ጉ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿
༇࿿D࿿ጊ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༈࿿D࿿ጋ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༉࿿D࿿ጌ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��༈࿿D࿿ጋ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༉࿿D࿿ጌ࿿
C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༊࿿D࿿ግ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿་࿿D࿿ጎ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༌࿿D࿿ጏ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿།࿿D࿿ጐ࿿
C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༎࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༏࿿D࿿ጒ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༐࿿D࿿ጓ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༑࿿D࿿ጔ࿿
C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༒࿿D࿿ጕ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༓࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༔࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༕࿿D࿿
ጘ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༖࿿D࿿ጙ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༗࿿D࿿ጚ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༘࿿D࿿ጛ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༙࿿D࿿
ጜ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༚࿿D࿿ጝ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༛࿿D࿿ጞ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༜࿿D࿿ጟ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༝࿿D࿿
ጠ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༞࿿D࿿ጡ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༟࿿D࿿ጢ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༠࿿D࿿ጣ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༡࿿D࿿
ጤ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༢࿿D࿿ጥ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༣࿿D࿿ጦ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༤࿿D࿿ጧ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༥࿿D࿿
ጨ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༦࿿D࿿ጩ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༧࿿D࿿ጪ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༨࿿D࿿ጫ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༩࿿D࿿
ጬ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༪࿿D࿿ጭ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༫࿿D࿿ጮ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༬࿿D࿿ጯ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༭࿿D࿿
ጰ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༮࿿D࿿ጱ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༯࿿D࿿ጲ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༰࿿D࿿ጳ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༱࿿D࿿
ጴ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༲࿿D࿿ጵ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༳࿿D࿿ጶ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༴࿿D࿿ጷ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༵࿿D࿿
ጸ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༶࿿D࿿ጹ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘༷࿿D࿿ጺ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༸࿿D࿿ጻ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༹༘࿿D࿿
ጼ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༺࿿D࿿ጽ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༻࿿D࿿ጾ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༼࿿D࿿ጿ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༽࿿D࿿
ፀ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༾࿿D࿿ፁ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༿࿿D࿿ፂ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཀ࿿D࿿ፃ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཁ࿿D࿿
ፄ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ག࿿D࿿ፅ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿གྷ࿿D࿿ፆ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ང࿿D࿿ፇ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཅ࿿D࿿
ፈ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཆ࿿D࿿ፉ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཇ࿿D࿿ፊ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿཈࿿D࿿ፋ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཉ࿿D࿿
ፌ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཊ࿿D࿿ፍ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཋ࿿D࿿ፎ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཌ࿿D࿿ፏ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཌྷ࿿D࿿
ፐ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཎ࿿D࿿ፑ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཏ࿿D࿿ፒ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཐ࿿D࿿ፓ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ད࿿P࿿
ፔ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿དྷ࿿P࿿ፕ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿ན࿿P࿿ፖ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿པ࿿P࿿ፗ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿
ཕ࿿P࿿ፘ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿བ࿿P࿿ፙ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР#࿿ΐΒ࿿བྷ࿿D࿿ፚ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿མ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿ཙ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཚ࿿D࿿࿿ ፝ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཛ࿿D࿿࿿ ፞ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཛྷ࿿D࿿࿿ ፟ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿက
οРР࿿࿿ཝ࿿D࿿፠࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཞ࿿D࿿፡࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཟ࿿D࿿።࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿འ࿿D࿿፣࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཡ࿿D࿿፤࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ར࿿D࿿፥࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ལ࿿D࿿፦࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཤ࿿D࿿፧࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཥ࿿D࿿፨࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ས࿿D࿿፩࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཧ࿿D࿿፪࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཨ࿿D࿿፫࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཀྵ࿿D࿿፬࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཪ࿿D࿿፭࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཫ࿿D࿿፮࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཬ࿿D࿿፯࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿፰࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿፱࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿፲࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿፳࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿D࿿፴࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ི༘࿿D࿿፵࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿ ི D࿿፶࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ུ༘࿿D࿿፷࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿ ུ D࿿፸࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿ ྲྀ D࿿፹࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿ ཱྲྀ D࿿፺࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ླྀ࿿ྲྀ D࿿፻࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ླྀ࿿ ཱྲྀ D࿿፼࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ེ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཻ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ོ༘࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཽ༘࿿D࿿ᎀ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ཾ࿿D࿿ᎁ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ཿ࿿D࿿ᎂ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿D࿿ᎃ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ཱ༘࿿ ྲྀ D࿿ᎄ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྂ࿿D࿿ᎅ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྃ࿿D࿿ᎆ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿྄༘࿿D࿿ᎇ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿྅࿿D࿿ᎈ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘྆࿿D࿿ᎉ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘྇࿿D࿿ᎊ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྈ࿿D࿿ᎋ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ྉ࿿D࿿ᎌ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྊ࿿D࿿ᎍ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྋ࿿D࿿ᎎ࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿ᎏ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿ྍ࿿D࿿᎐࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྍ࿿D࿿᎑࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿ྍ࿿D࿿᎒࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྐ࿿D࿿᎓࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྑ࿿D࿿᎔࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྒ࿿D࿿᎕࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྒ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿᎖࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྔ࿿D࿿᎗࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྕ࿿D࿿᎘࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྖ࿿D࿿᎙࿿ C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྗ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྙ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྚ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྛ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྜ࿿D࿿࿿࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྜ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭰ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྞ࿿D࿿Ꭱ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྟ࿿D࿿Ꭲ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྠ࿿D࿿Ꭳ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྡ࿿D࿿Ꭴ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྡ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭵ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྣ࿿D࿿Ꭶ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྤ࿿D࿿Ꭷ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྥ࿿D࿿Ꭸ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྦ࿿D࿿Ꭹ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྦ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭺ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྨ࿿D࿿Ꭻ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྩ࿿D࿿Ꭼ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྪ࿿D࿿Ꭽ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྫ࿿D࿿Ꭾ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྫ࿿ ྒྷ D࿿Ꭿ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྭ࿿D࿿Ꮀ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྮ࿿D࿿Ꮁ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྯ࿿D࿿Ꮂ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྰ࿿D࿿Ꮃ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྱ࿿D࿿Ꮄ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྲྀ࿿D࿿Ꮅ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ླྀ࿿D࿿Ꮆ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྴ࿿D࿿Ꮇ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྵ࿿D࿿Ꮈ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྶ࿿D࿿Ꮉ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྒྷ࿿D࿿Ꮊ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྸ࿿D࿿Ꮋ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿༘ྐ࿿ ྵ D࿿Ꮌ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྺ࿿D࿿Ꮍ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྻ࿿D࿿Ꮎ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿༘ྼ࿿D࿿Ꮏ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿿࿿D࿿Ꮐ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿྾࿿D࿿Ꮑ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿྿࿿D࿿Ꮒ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿀࿿D࿿Ꮓ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
ကοРР࿿࿿࿁࿿D࿿Ꮔ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿂࿿D࿿Ꮕ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿃࿿D࿿Ꮖ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿကοРР࿿࿿࿄࿿D࿿Ꮗ࿿C࿿Ɓǀ��ǿ
Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge University
Press, Delhi, 2015.

GE8151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LTPC

COURSE OBJECTIVES: 3003

0 To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving

1 To read and write simple Python programs.
2 To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
3 To define Python functions and call them.
4 To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries.
5 To do input/output with files in Python.

UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo
code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for
developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card
in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.
UNIT II DATA, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9
Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators, comments; modules
and functions, function definition and use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments; Illustrative

23
programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between
two points.

UNIT III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS 9

Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained conditional
(if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return values,
parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string slices,
immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative programs:
square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary search.

UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9

Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list parameters;
Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and methods; advanced list
processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: selection sort, insertion sort, mergesort,
histogram.

UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9

Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
0 Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
1 Read, write, execute by hand simple Python programs.
2 Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
3 Decompose a Python program into functions.
4 Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
5 Read and write data from/to files in Python Programs.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
0 Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016 (http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-
python/)
1 Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and updated
for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
REFERENCES:
0 Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational Problem-
Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
1 John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised
and expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
2 Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning, 2012.
3 Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An Introduction to
Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers, LLC, 2013.
4 Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in Python:
An Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5 Timothy A. Budd, “Exploring Python”, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,, 2015.

24
GE8152 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS LT PC
OBJECTIVES: 2 0 44

0 To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas and design of
Engineering products.
1 T o expose them to existing national standards related to technical drawings.

CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1

Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS conventions
and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and dimensioning.

UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 7+12

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction of
ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid – construction of
involutes of square and circle – Drawing of tangents and normal to the above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles –Representation of Three
Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of
objects

UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12

Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces Projection of
planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.

UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 5+12

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the axis is
inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.

UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF

SURFACES 5+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one of
the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders and cones.

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12

Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by visual
ray method .
TOTAL: 90 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
0 familiarize with the fundamentals and standards of Engineering graphics

25
 0 perform freehand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of objects.
1 project orthographic projections of lines and plane surfaces.
2 draw projections and solids and development of surfaces.
3 visualize and to project isometric and perspective sections of simple solids.

TEXT BOOK:
0 Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai,
2009.
1 Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P) Limited,
2008.

REFERENCES:
0 Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
1 Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 50th Edition,
2010.
2 Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
3 Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4 N S Parthasarathy And Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New Delhi,
2015.
5 Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2009.

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

0 IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
1 IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
2 IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
3 IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
4 IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.

Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

0 There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
1 All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
2 The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will
be permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
3 The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

GE8161 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LT P C

LABORATORY 0042

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
0 To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
1 To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
26
 0 Use functions for structuring Python programs.
1 Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
2 Read and write data from/to files in Python.

LIST OF PROGRAMS
0 Compute the GCD of two numbers.
1 Find the square root of a number (Newton’s method)
2 Exponentiation (power of a number)
3 Find the maximum of a list of numbers
4 Linear search and Binary search
5 Selection sort, Insertion sort
6 Merge sort
7 First n prime numbers
8 Multiply matrices
9 Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
10 Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
11 Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
12 Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame

PLATFORM NEEDED
Python 3 interpreter for Windows/Linux

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
0 Write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
1 Implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
2 Develop Python programs step-wise by defining functions and calling them.
3 Use Python lists, tuples, dictionaries for representing compound data.
4 Read and write data from/to files in Python.

TOTAL :60 PERIODS

BS8161 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY LT P C

OBJECTIVES: (Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech Programmes) 00 4 2

0 To introduce different experiments to test basic understanding of physics concepts applied in optics,
thermal physics, properties of matter and liquids.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: PHYSICS LABORATORY (Any 5 Experiments)

0 Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum
1 Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending method
2 (a) Determination of wavelength, and particle size using Laser
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
27
 0 Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc method.
1 Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid – Ultrasonic interferometer
2 Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
3 Determination of band gap of a semiconductor
4 Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
0 apply principles of elasticity, optics and thermal properties for engineering applications.

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)

OBJECTIVES:

0 To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality parameters
through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
 To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by viscometery.

0 Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination of alkalinity in water
sample.
1 Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
2 Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
3 Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method.
4 Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
5 Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
6 Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
7 Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
8 Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer (1,
10-Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
9 Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame photometer.
10 Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
11 Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
12 Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
13 Determination of CMC.
14 Phase change in a solid.
15 Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.

OUTCOMES:
0 The students will be outfitted with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical analysis of
water quality related parameters.

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8TH edition, 2014)

28
Listening- Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – mechanics of presentations-
Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing- email etiquette- job application – cover letter
–Résumé preparation( via email and hard copy)- analytical essays and issue based essays--
Vocabulary Development- finding suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-. Language Development-
clauses- if conditionals.

UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 12

Listening- TED/Ink talks; Speaking –participating in a group discussion -Reading– reading and
understanding technical articles Writing– Writing reports- minutes of a meeting- accident and survey-
Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported speech

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

29
 HS8251 TECHNICAL ENGLISH L T P C4 0 0 4

OBJECTIVES: The Course prepares second semester engineering and Technology students
to:

0 Develop strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and comprehend engineering and
technology texts.
1 Foster their ability to write convincing job applications and effective reports.
2 Develop their speaking skills to make technical presentations , participate in group discussions.
3 Strengthen their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and talks in their areas
of specialisation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TECHNICAL ENGLISH 12

Listening- Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing information-gap
exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading short technical texts from
journals- newsapapers- Writing- purpose statements – extended definitions – issue- writing
instructions – checklists-recommendations-Vocabulary Development- technical vocabulary
Language Development –subject verb agreement - compound words.
UNIT II READING AND STUDY SKILLS 12

Listening- Listening to longer technical talks and completing exercises based on them-Speaking –
describing a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various transitions in a
text- paragraphing- Writing - interpreting cgarts, graphs- Vocabulary Development-vocabularyused
in formal letters/emails and reports Language Development- impersonal passive voice, numerical
adjectives.

UNIT III TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMAR 12

Listening- Listening to classroom lectures/ talkls on engineering/technology -Speaking – introduction
to technical presentations- Reading – longer texts both general and technical, practice in speed
reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words- Vocabulary Development-sequence
words- Misspelled words. Language Development- embedded sentences

UNIT IV REPORT WRITING 12

OUTCOMES: At the end of the course learners will be able to:
0 Read technical texts and write area- specific texts effortlessly.
1 Listen and comprehend lectures and talks in their area of specialisation successfully.
2 Speak appropriately and effectively in varied formal and informal contexts.
3 Write reports and winning job applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
0 Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and Technology.
Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad: 2016
1 Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication. Cambridge
University Press: New Delhi, 2016.

REFERENCES
0 Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.
1 Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2007
2 Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
3 Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges.
Cengage Learning, USA: 2007
4 Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles and
Practice.Oxford University Press: New Delhi,2014.

Students can be asked to read Tagore, Chetan Bhagat and for suplementary reading.

MA8251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C

OBJECTIVES : 4 0 0 4

0 This course is designed to cover topics such as Matrix Algebra, Vector Calculus, Complex
Analysis and Laplace Transform. Matrix Algebra is one of the powerful tools to handle practical
problems arising in the field of engineering. Vector calculus can be widely used for modelling the
various laws of physics. The various methods of complex analysis and Laplace transforms can be
used for efficiently solving the problems that occur in various branches of engineering disciplines.

UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of Eigenvalues
and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices – Reduction of a
quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms.

UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12

Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl - Vector identities – Irrotational and
Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral - Area of a curved
30
surface - Volume integral - Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems – Verification and
application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.

UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12

Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates - Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function - Conformal
1
mapping – Mapping by functions w  z  c, cz, z ,z2 - Bilinear transformation.

UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12

Line integral - Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s series
– Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem for evaluation of real
integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.

UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12

Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function and unit
impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives and integrals –
Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem – Transform of periodic
functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary differential equations with constant
coefficients.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :

After successfully completing the course, the student will have a good understanding of the following
topics and their applications:

0 Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, diagonalization of a matrix, Symmetric matrices, Positive

definite matrices and similar matrices.
1 Gradient, divergence and curl of a vector point function and related identities.
2 Evaluation of line, surface and volume integrals using Gauss, Stokes and Green’s theorems
and their verification.
3 Analytic functions, conformal mapping and complex integration.
4 Laplace transform and inverse transform of simple functions, properties, various related
theorems and application to differential equations with constant coefficients.

TEXT BOOKS :

1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,

43rd Edition, 2014.
2. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons,
th
10 Edition, New Delhi, 2016.

REFERENCES :

0 Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall Media (An
imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
1 Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. O’Neil, P.V. “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd, New
Delhi, 2007.

31
 4. Sastry, S.S, “Engineering Mathematics", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd,
4th Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
0 Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.

PH8253 PHYSICS FOR ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C

(Common to BME, ME, CC, ECE, EEE, E&I, ICE) 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
0 To understand the essential principles of Physics of semiconductor device and Electron transport
properties. Become proficient in magnetic, dielectric and optical properties of materials and nano
devices.

UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity,
expression - Wiedemann-Franz law – Success and failures - electrons in metals – Particle in a three
dimensional box – degenerate states – Fermi- Dirac statistics – Density of energy states – Electron in
periodic potential: Bloch thorem – metals and insulators - Energy bands in solids– tight binding
approximation - Electron effective mass – concept of hole.

UNIT II SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 9

Intrinsic Semiconductors – Energy band diagram – direct and indirect semiconductors – Carrier
concentration in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors - Carrier concentration in N-type
& P-type semiconductors – Carrier transport: Velocity-electric field relations – drift and diffusion
transport - Einstein’s relation – Hall effect and devices – Zener and avalanche breakdown in p-n
junctions - Ohmic contacts – tunnel diode - Schottky diode – MOS capacitor - power transistor.

UNIT III MAGNETIC AND DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Magnetism in materials – magnetic field and induction – magnetization - magnetic permeability and
susceptibility–types of magnetic materials – microscopic classification of magnetic materials -
Ferromagnetism: origin and exchange interaction- saturation magnetization and Curie temperature –
Domain Theory. Dielectric materials: Polarization processes – dielectric loss – internal field –
Clausius-Mosotti relation- dielectric breakdown – high-k dielectrics.

UNIT IV OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classification of optical materials – carrier generation and recombination processes - Absorption
emission and scattering of light in metals, insulators and Semiconductors (concepts only) - photo
current in a P- N diode – solar cell –photo detectors - LED – Organic LED – Laser diodes – excitons -
quantum confined Stark effect – quantum dot laser.

UNIT V NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 9

Introduction - electron density in bulk material – Size dependence of Fermi energy– quantum
confinement – quantum structures - Density of states in quantum well, quantum wire and quantum dot
structures –Zener-Bloch oscillations – resonant tunneling – quantum interference effects –
mesoscopic structures: conductance fluctuations and coherent transport – Coulomb blockade effects -
Single electron phenomena and Single electron Transistor – magnetic semiconductors– spintronics -
Carbon nanotubes: Properties and applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
32
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the students will able to
0 gain knowledge on classical and quantum electron theories, and energy band structuues,
1 acquire knowledge on basics of semiconductor physics and its applications in various devices,
2 get knowledge on magnetic and dielectric properties of materials,
3 have the necessary understanding on the functioning of optical materials for optoelectronics,
4 understand the basics of quantum structures and their applications in spintronics and carbon
electronics.

TEXT BOOKS:
0 Kasap, S.O. “Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices”, McGraw-Hill Education, 2007.
1 Umesh K Mishra & Jasprit Singh, “Semiconductor Device Physics and Design”, Springer,
2008.
2 Wahab, M.A. “Solid State Physics: Structure and Properties of Materials”. Narosa Publishing
House, 2009.

REFERENCES
0 Garcia, N. & Damask, A. “Physics for Computer Science Students”. Springer-Verlag, 2012.
1 Hanson, G.W. “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”. Pearson Education, 2009
2 Rogers, B., Adams, J. & Pennathur, S. “Nanotechnology: Understanding
Small Systems”. CRC Press, 2014

BE8252 BASIC CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

4004

OBJECTIVES:
0 To impart basic knowledge on Civil and Mechanical Engineering.
1 To familiarize the materials and measurements used in Civil Engineering.
2 To provide the exposure on the fundamental elements of civil engineering structures.
3 To enable the students to distinguish the components and working principle of power
plant units, IC engines, and R & AC system.
A – OVER VIEW
UNIT I SCOPE OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 10

Overview of Civil Engineering - Civil Engineering contributions to the welfare of Society –

Specialized sub disciplines in Civil Engineering – Structural, Construction, Geotechnical,
Environmental, Transportation and Water Resources Engineering

Overview of Mechanical Engineering - Mechanical Engineering contributions to the welfare of

Society –Specialized sub disciplines in Mechanical Engineering - Production, Automobile, Energy
Engineering - Interdisciplinary concepts in Civil and Mechanical Engineering.

B – CIVIL ENGINEERING

33
UNIT II SURVEYING AND CIVIL ENGINEERING MATERIALS 10

Surveying: Objects – classification – principles – measurements of distances – angles – leveling –

determination of areas– contours - examples.

Civil Engineering Materials:Bricks – stones – sand – cement – concrete – steel - timber - modern
materials

UNIT III BUILDING COMPONENTS AND STRUCTURES 15

Foundations: Types of foundations - Bearing capacity and settlement – Requirement of good
foundations.
Civil Engineering Structures: Brickmasonry – stonemasonry – beams – columns – lintels – roofing
– flooring – plastering – floor area, carpet area and floor space index - Types of Bridges and Dams –
water supply - sources and quality of water - Rain water harvesting - introduction to high way and rail
way.
C – MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

UNIT IV INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND POWER PLANTS 15

Classification of Power Plants - Internal combustion engines as automobile power plant – Working
principle of Petrol and Diesel Engines – Four stroke and two stroke cycles – Comparison of four
stroke and two stroke engines – Working principle of steam, Gas, Diesel, Hydro - electric and
Nuclear Power plants –- working principle of Boilers, Turbines, Reciprocating Pumps (single acting
and double acting) and Centrifugal Pumps

UNIT V REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 10

Terminology of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning. Principle of vapour compression and absorption
system–Layout of typical domestic refrigerator–Window and Split type room Air conditioner.

OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
0 appreciate the Civil and Mechanical Engineering components of Projects.
1 explain the usage of construction material and proper selection of construction materials.
2 measure distances and area by surveying
3 identify the components used in power plant cycle.
4 demonstrate working principles of petrol and diesel engine.
5 elaborate the components of refrigeration and Air conditioning cycle.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
0 Shanmugam Gand Palanichamy MS,“Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering”,Tata McGraw
Hill PublishingCo.,NewDelhi,1996.

REFERENCES:
0 Palanikumar, K. Basic Mechanical Engineering, ARS Publications, 2010.
1 Ramamrutham S.,“Basic Civil Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd.1999.
2 Seetharaman S.,“BasicCivil Engineering”,AnuradhaAgencies,2005.
3 ShanthaKumar SRJ.,“Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai,
2000.

34
0 Venugopal K. and Prahu Raja V., “Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Anuradha Publishers,
Kumbakonam,2000.

EE8251 CIRCUIT THEORY L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 2 2 0 3

0 To introduce electric circuits and its analysis

1 To impart knowledge on solving circuit equations using network theorems
2 To introduce the phenomenon of resonance in coupled circuits.
3 To educate on obtaining the transient response of circuits.
4 To introduce Phasor diagrams and analysis of three phase circuits

UNIT I BASIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS 6+6

Resistive elements - Ohm’s Law Resistors in series and parallel circuits – Kirchoffs laws – Mesh
current and node voltage - methods of analysis.

UNIT II NETWORK REDUCTION AND THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC IRCUITS 6+6

Network reduction: voltage and current division, source transformation – star delta conversion.
Thevenins and Norton Theorems – Superposition Theorem – Maximum power transfer theorem –
Reciprocity Theorem – Millman's theorem.

UNIT III TRANSIENT RESPONSE ANALYSIS 6+6

L and C elements -Transient response of RL, RC and RLC Circuits using Laplace transform for
DC input and A.C. sinusoidal input.

UNIT IV THREE PHASE CIRCUITS 6+6

A.C. circuits – Average and RMS value - Phasor Diagram – Power, Power Factor and Energy.-
Analysis of three phase 3-wire and 4-wire circuits with star and delta connected loads, balanced
& un balanced – phasor diagram of voltages and currents – power measurement in three phase
circuits.

UNIT V RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 6+6

Series and parallel resonance – their frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth - Self
and mutual inductance – Coefficient of coupling – Tuned circuits – Single tuned circuits.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 Ability to analyse electrical circuits
1 Ability to apply circuit theorems
2 Ability to analyse transients

TEXT BOOKS:
0 William H. Hayt Jr, Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering
Circuits Analysis”, McGraw Hill publishers, edition, New Delhi, 2013.
1 Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric
Circuits”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill, 2013.

35
 0 Allan H. Robbins, Wilhelm C. Miller, “Circuit Analysis Theory and Practice”,
Cengage Learning India, 2013.

REFERENCES

0 Chakrabarti A, “Circuits Theory (Analysis and synthesis), Dhanpath Rai & Sons,
New Delhi, 1999.
1 Jegatheesan, R., “Analysis of Electric Circuits,” McGraw Hill, 2015.
2 Joseph A. Edminister, Mahmood Nahri, “Electric circuits”, Schaum’s series,
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
3 M E Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”,Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi, 2015.
4 Mahadevan, K., Chitra, C., “Electric Circuits Analysis,” Prentice-Hall of India Pvt
Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.
5 Richard C. Dorf and James A. Svoboda, “Introduction to Electric Circuits”, 7th
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2015.
6 Sudhakar A and Shyam Mohan SP, “Circuits and Network Analysis and
Synthesis”, McGraw Hill, 2015.

GE8291 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING LTPC

3003

OBJECTIVES:
0 To study the nature and facts about environment.
1 To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to
environmental problems.
2 To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
3 To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human world;
envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
4 To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth‟s interior and
surface.
5 To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and waste
management.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness - concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers –
energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest
ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams,
lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species and
ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity: consumptive use,
productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – Biodiversity at global, national and local

36
levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to biodiversity: habitat
loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic species of India –
conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. Field study of common
plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes, etc.

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8

Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil pollution
(d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid waste
management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an individual in
prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and
landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural.

UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 10

Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,
dams and their effects on forests and tribal people – Water resources: Use and over- utilization of
surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems – Mineral
resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources,
case studies – Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and
overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case
studies – Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources,
use of alternate energy sources. case studies – Land resources: Land as a resource, land
degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification – role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field study of
local area to document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.

UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7

From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies – role of non-governmental organization-
environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming, acid rain,
ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland reclamation –
consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air (Prevention and Control of
Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife protection act – Forest
conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in environmental legislation- central and state
pollution control boards- Public awareness.

UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6

Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and child
welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 Environmental Pollution or problems cannot be solved by mere laws. Public participation is an
important aspect which serves the environmental Protection. One will obtain knowledge on the
following after completing the course.
1 Public awareness of environmental is at infant stage.
2 Ignorance and incomplete knowledge has lead to misconceptions
3 Development and improvement in std. of living has lead to serious environmental disasters

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.

37
 0 Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.

REFERENCES :
0 Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT LTD,New Delhi, 2007.
1 Erach Bharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD,
Hydrabad, 2015.
2 G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning India PVT,
LTD, Delhi, 2014.
3 Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, 2005.

GE8261 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LTPC

0042

OBJECTIVES:
0 To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering
practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.

GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)

I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

Buildings:

0 Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings.

Safety aspects.

Plumbing Works:
0 Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions,
reducers, elbows in household fittings.
1 Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
2 Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
3 Hands-on-exercise:

Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with
different joining components.

(e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.

Carpentry using Power Tools only:

0 Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
1 Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.

II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 18

Welding:
38
 0 Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc welding.
1 Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
0 Simple Turning and Taper turning
1 Drilling Practice

Sheet Metal Work:

0 Forming & Bending:
1 Model making – Trays and funnels.
2 Different type of joints.

Machine assembly practice:

0 Study of centrifugal pump
1 Study of air conditioner

Demonstration on:
0 Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending. Example –
Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
1 Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
2 Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and V – fitting models.

GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)

III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

0 Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter.
1 Fluorescent lamp wiring.
2 Stair case wiring
0 Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in RLC circuit.
0 Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
1 Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.

IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 16

1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement
of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency) using CR.
0 Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
1 Generation of Clock Signal.
2 Soldering practice – Components Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.

3 Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
0 fabricate carpentry components and pipe connections including plumbing works.
1 use welding equipments to join the structures.
2 Carry out the basic machining operations
3 Make the models using sheet metal works
4 Illustrate on centrifugal pump, Air conditioner, operations of smithy, foundary and
fittings
5 Carry out basic home electrical works and appliances
6 Measure the electrical quantities
7 Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices.

39
 LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CIVIL
0 Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes,
plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and
other fittings. 15 Sets.
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5. Power Tools: (a) Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
(b) Demolition Hammer 2 Nos
(c) Circular Saw 2 Nos
(d) Planer 2 Nos
(e) Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos
(f) Jigsaw 2 Nos
MECHANICAL

1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.

2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.

3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer,
wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.

6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.

7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner One each.
ELECTRICAL

1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets

2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 each
4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.
5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos
(b) Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos
ELECTRONICS

1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.

2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
0 Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power
supply

40
EE8261 ELECTRIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY L T P C
OBJECTIVES: 0 0 4 2

0 To simulate various electric circuits using Pspice/ Matlab/e-Sim / Scilab

1 To gain practical experience on electric circuits and verification of theorems.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
0 Simulation and experimental verification of electrical circuit problems using Kirchhoff’s
voltage and current laws.
2. Simulation and experimental verification of electrical circuit problems using Thevenin’s
theorem.
3. Simulation and experimental verification of electrical circuit problems using Norton’s
theorem.
4. Simulation and experimental verification of electrical circuit problems using Superposition
theorem.
0 Simulation and experimental verification of Maximum Power transfer Theorem.
1 Study of Analog and digital oscilloscopes and measurement of sinusoidal voltage,
frequency and power factor.
2 Simulation and Experimental validation of R-C electric circuit transients.
3 Simulation and Experimental validation of frequency response of RLC electric circuit.
4 Design and Simulation of series resonance circuit.
0 Design and Simulation of parallel resonant circuits.
1 Simulation of three phase balanced and unbalanced star, delta networks circuits.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 Understand and apply circuit theorems and concepts in engineering applications.
1 Simulate electric circuits.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

0 Regulated Power Supply: 0 – 15 V D.C - 10 Nos / Distributed Power Source.

1 Function Generator (1 MHz) - 10 Nos.
2 Single Phase Energy Meter - 1 No.
4 Oscilloscope (20 MHz) - 10 Nos.
0 Digital Storage Oscilloscope (20 MHz) – 1 No.
1 10 Nos. of PC with Circuit Simulation Software (min 10 Users) ( e-Sim / Scilab/
Pspice / MATLAB /other Equivalent software Package) and Printer (1 No.)
2 AC/DC - Voltmeters (10 Nos.), Ammeters (10 Nos.) and Multi-meters (10 Nos.)
3 Single Phase Wattmeter – 3 Nos.
0 Decade Resistance Box, Decade Inductance Box, Decade Capacitance Box - 6 Nos
each.
1 Circuit Connection Boards - 10 Nos.

Necessary Quantities of Resistors, Inductors, Capacitors of various capacities (Quarter Watt to

10 Watt)

41
MA8353TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C
OBJECTIVES : 4 00 4

0 To introduce the basic concepts of PDE for solving standard partial differential equations.
1 To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems.
2 To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used in
various situations.
3 To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations.
4 To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations
that model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete time
systems.

UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Formation of partial differential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of standard types of first
order partial differential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation - Linear partial differential equations of
second and higher order with constant coefficients of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous
types.

UNIT II FOURIER SERIES 12

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series –
Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier series – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier Series Solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of
two dimensional equation of heat conduction.

UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 12

Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and cosine transforms –
Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity.

UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 12

Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform (using partial fraction and residues) –
Initial and final value theorems - Convolution theorem - Formation of difference equations – Solution
of difference equations using Z - transform.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
0 Understand how to solve the given standard partial differential equations.
1 Solve differential equations using Fourier series analysis which plays a vital role in engineering
applications.
2 Appreciate the physical significance of Fourier series techniques in solving one and two
dimensional heat flow problems and one dimensional wave equations.
42
 0 Understand the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations would
provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering.
1 Use the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations by using Z
transform techniques for discrete time systems.

TEXT BOOKS :

0 Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics", 43rd Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2014.
1 Narayanan S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students", Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 1998.

REFERENCES :

0 Andrews, L.C and Shivamoggi, B, "Integral Transforms for Engineers" SPIE Press, 1999.
1 Bali. N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 9th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2014.
2 Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, India, 2016.
3 James, G., "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
4 Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,
2016.
5 Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.

EE8351 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 2 2 0 3

0 To study various number systems and simplify the logical expressions using Boolean
functions
0 To study combinational circuits
1 To design various synchronous and asynchronous circuits.
2 To introduce asynchronous sequential circuits and PLDs
3 To introduce digital simulation for development of application oriented logic circuits.

UNIT I NUMBER SYSTEMS AND DIGITAL LOGIC FAMILIES 6+6

Review of number systems, binary codes, error detection and correction codes (Parity and
Hamming code) - Digital Logic Families - comparison of RTL, DTL, TTL, ECL and MOS
families -operation, characteristics of digital logic family.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS

6+6
Combinational logic - representation of logic functions-SOP and POS forms, K-map
representations - minimization using K maps - simplification and implementation of
combinational logic – multiplexers and de multiplexers - code converters, adders,
subtractors, Encoders and Decoders.

43
 UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 6+6
Sequential logic- SR, JK, D and T flip flops - level triggering and edge triggering - counters -
asynchronous and synchronous type - Modulo counters - Shift registers - design of
synchronous sequential circuits – Moore and Melay models- Counters, state diagram; state
reduction; state assignment.

UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS AND 6+6

PROGRAMMABILITY LOGIC DEVICES
Asynchronous sequential logic circuits-Transition tability, flow tability-race conditions, hazards
&errors in digital circuits; analysis of asynchronous sequential logic circuits-introduction to
Programmability Logic Devices: PROM – PLA –PAL, CPLD-FPGA.

UNIT V VHDL 6+6

RTL Design – combinational logic – Sequential circuit – Operators – Introduction to
Packages – Subprograms – Test bench. (Simulation /Tutorial Examples: adders, counters,
flip flops, Multiplexers & De multiplexers).
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:

0 Ability to design combinational and sequential Circuits.

1 Ability to simulate using software package.
2 Ability to study various number systems and simplify the logical expressions
using Boolean functions
3 Ability to design various synchronous and asynchronous circuits.
4 Ability to introduce asynchronous sequential circuits and PLDs
5 Ability to introduce digital simulation for development of application oriented logic
circuits.
TEXT BOOKS:
0 James W. Bignel, Digital Electronics, Cengage learning, 5th Edition, 2007.
1 M. Morris Mano, ‘Digital Design with an introduction to the VHDL’, Pearson
Education, 2013.
2 Comer “Digital Logic & State Machine Design, Oxford, 2012.
REFERENCES
0 Mandal, “Digital Electronics Principles & Application, McGraw Hill Edu, 2013.
1 William Keitz, Digital Electronics-A Practical Approach with VHDL, Pearson, 2013.
2 Thomas L.Floyd, ‘Digital Fundamentals’, 11th edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
3 Charles H.Roth, Jr, Lizy Lizy Kurian John, ‘Digital System Design using VHDL,
Cengage, 2013.
4 D.P.Kothari,J.S.Dhillon, ‘Digital circuits and Design’,Pearson Education, 2016.

EE8391 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY L T P C

2 2 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
0 To introduce the basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic vector fields
1 To impart knowledge on the concepts of
0 Electrostatic fields, electrical potential, energy density and their applications.
1 Magneto static fields, magnetic flux density, vector potential and its applications.
44
 0 Different methods of emf generation and Maxwell’s equations
1 Electromagnetic waves and characterizing parameters

UNIT I ELECTROSTATICS – I 6+6

Sources and effects of electromagnetic fields – Coordinate Systems – Vector fields –Gradient,
Divergence, Curl – theorems and applications - Coulomb’s Law – Electric field intensity – Field
due to discrete and continuous charges – Gauss’s law and applications.

UNIT II ELECTROSTATICS – II 6+6

Electric potential – Electric field and equipotential plots, Uniform and Non- Uniform field,
Utilization factor – Electric field in free space, conductors, dielectrics - Dielectric polarization –
Dielectric strength - Electric field in multiple dielectrics – Boundary conditions, Poisson’s and
Laplace’s equations, Capacitance, Energy density, Applications.

UNIT III MAGNETOSTATICS 6+6

Lorentz force, magnetic field intensity (H) – Biot–Savart’s Law - Ampere’s Circuit Law – H due to
straight conductors, circular loop, infinite sheet of current, Magnetic flux density (B) – B in free
space, conductor, magnetic materials – Magnetization, Magnetic field in multiple media –
Boundary conditions, scalar and vector potential, Poisson’s Equation, Magnetic force, Torque,
Inductance, Energy density, Applications.

UNIT IV ELECTRODYNAMIC FIELDS 6+6

Magnetic Circuits - Faraday’s law – Transformer and motional EMF – Displacement current -
Maxwell’s equations (differential and integral form) – Relation between field theory and circuit
theory – Applications.

UNIT V ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 6+6

Electromagnetic wave generation and equations – Wave parameters; velocity, intrinsic
impedance, propagation constant – Waves in free space, lossy and lossless dielectrics,
conductors- skin depth - Poynting vector – Plane wave reflection and refraction.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 Ability to understand the basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic vector
fields.
1 Ability to understand the basic concepts about electrostatic fields, electrical potential,
energy density and their applications.
2 Ability to acquire the knowledge in magneto static fields, magnetic flux density, vector
potential and its applications.
3 Ability to understand the different methods of emf generation and Maxwell’s equations
4 Ability to understand the basic concepts electromagnetic waves and characterizing
parameters
5 Ability to understand and compute Electromagnetic fields and apply them for design and
analysis of electrical equipment and systems
TEXT BOOKS:
0 Mathew N. O. Sadiku, ‘Principles of Electromagnetics’, 6th Edition, Oxford University
Press Inc. Asian edition, 2015.
1 William H. Hayt and John A. Buck, ‘Engineering Electromagnetics’, McGraw Hill Special
Indian edition, 2014.
0 Kraus and Fleish, ‘Electromagnetics with Applications’, McGraw Hill International
Editions, Fifth Edition, 2010.

45
REFERENCES
0 V.V.Sarwate, ‘Electromagnetic fields and waves’, First Edition, Newage Publishers,
1993.
1 J.P.Tewari, ‘Engineering Electromagnetics - Theory, Problems and Applications’, Second
Edition, Khanna Publishers.
2 Joseph. A.Edminister, ‘Schaum’s Outline of Electromagnetics, Third Edition (Schaum’s
Outline Series), McGraw Hill, 2010.
3 S.P.Ghosh, Lipika Datta, ‘Electromagnetic Field Theory’, First Edition, McGraw Hill
Education(India) Private Limited, 2012.
4 K A Gangadhar, ‘Electromagnetic Field Theory’, Khanna Publishers; Eighth Reprint :
2015

EE8301 L T P C
ELECTRICAL MACHINES – I 2 2 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
0 Magnetic-circuit analysis and introduce magnetic materials
1 Constructional details, the principle of operation, prediction of performance, the
methods of testing the transformers and three phase transformer connections.
2 Working principles of electrical machines using the concepts of electromechanical
energy conversion principles and derive expressions for generated voltage and torque
developed in all Electrical Machines.
3 Working principles of DC machines as Generator types, determination of their no-
load/load characteristics, starting and methods of speed control of motors.
4 Various losses taking place in D.C. Motor and to study the different testing methods to
arrive at their performance.

UNIT I MAGNETIC CIRCUITS AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS 6+6

Magnetic circuits –Laws governing magnetic circuits - Flux linkage, Inductance and energy –
Statically and Dynamically induced EMF - Torque – Properties of magnetic materials,
Hysteresis and Eddy Current losses - AC excitation, introduction to permanent magnets-
Transformer as a magnetically coupled circuit.

UNIT II TRANSFORMERS 6+6

Construction – principle of operation – equivalent circuit parameters – phasor diagrams,
losses – testing – efficiency and voltage regulation-all day efficiency-Sumpner’s test, per unit
representation – inrush current - three phase transformers-connections – Scott Connection
– Phasing of transformer– parallel operation of three phase transformers-auto transformer –
tap changing transformers- tertiary winding.

UNIT III ELECTROMECHANICAL ENERGY CONVERSION AND CONCEPTS 6+6

IN ROTATING MACHINES
Energy in magnetic system – Field energy and co energy-force and torque equations – singly
and multiply excited magnetic field systems-mmf of distributed windings – Winding
Inductances-, magnetic fields in rotating machines – rotating mmf waves – magnetic

46
saturation and leakage fluxes.

UNIT IV DC GENERATORS 6+6

Construction and components of DC Machine – Principle of operation - Lap and wave
windings-EMF equations– circuit model – armature reaction –methods of excitation-
commutation - interpoles compensating winding –characteristics of DC generators.

UNIT V DC MOTORS 6+6

Principle and operations - types of DC Motors – Speed Torque Characteristics of DC Motors-
starting and speed control of DC motors –Plugging, dynamic and regenerative braking-
testing and efficiency – Retardation test - Swinburne’s test and Hopkinson’s test - Permanent
Magnet DC (PMDC)motors-applications of DC
Motor

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 Ability to analyze the magnetic-circuits.
1 Ability to acquire the knowledge in constructional details of transformers.
2 Ability to understand the concepts of electromechanical energy conversion.
3 Ability to acquire the knowledge in working principles of DC Generator.
4 Ability to acquire the knowledge in working principles of DC Motor
5 Ability to acquire the knowledge in various losses taking place in D.C. Machines
TEXT BOOKS:
0 Stephen J. Chapman, ‘Electric Machinery Fundamentals’4th edition, McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 2010.
1 P.C. Sen‘Principles of Electric Machines and Power Electronics’ John Wiley & Sons;
3rd Edition 2013.
2 Nagrath, I.J. and Kothari.D.P., Electric Machines’, McGraw-Hill Education, 2004

REFERENCES
0 Theodore Wildi, “Electrical Machines, Drives, and Power Systems”, Pearson
Education., (5th Edition), 2002.
1 B.R. Gupta ,’Fundamental of Electric Machines’ New age International
Publishers,3rd Edition ,Reprint 2015.
2 S.K. Bhattacharya, ‘Electrical Machines’ McGraw - Hill Education, New Delhi,
3rd Edition,2009.
3 Vincent Del Toro, ‘Basic Electric Machines’ Pearson India Education, 2016.
4 Surinder Pal Bali, ‘Electrical Technology Machines & Measurements, Vol.II, Pearson,
2013.
5 Fitzgerald. A.E., Charles Kingsely Jr, Stephen D.Umans, ‘Electric Machinery’, Sixth
edition, McGraw Hill Books Company, 2003.

47
EC8353 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LTPC
OBJECTIVES: 3 003

The student should be made to:

0 Understand the structure of basic electronic devices.
1 Be exposed to active and passive circuit elements.
2 Familiarize the operation and applications of transistor like BJT and FET.
3 Explore the characteristics of amplifier gain and frequency response.
4 Learn the required functionality of positive and negative feedback systems.

UNIT I PN JUNCTION DEVICES 9

PN junction diode –structure, operation and V-I characteristics, diffusion and transition capacitance -
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier,– Display devices- LED, Laser diodes, Zener
diodecharacteristics- Zener Reverse characteristics – Zener as regulator

UNIT II TRANSISTORS AND THYRISTORS 9

BJT, JFET, MOSFET- structure, operation, characteristics and Biasing UJT, Thyristors and IGBT -
Structure and characteristics.

UNIT III AMPLIFIERS 9

BJT small signal model – Analysis of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –MOSFET
small signal model– Analysis of CS and Source follower – Gain and frequency response- High
frequency analysis.

UNIT IV MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9

BIMOS cascade amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – FET
input stages – Single tuned amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods,
power amplifiers –Types (Qualitative analysis).

UNIT V FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9

Advantages of negative feedback – voltage / current, series , Shunt feedback –positive feedback –
Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley, Colpitts and Crystal oscillators.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course, the students will be ability to:
0 Explain the structure and working operation of basic electronic devices.
1 Able to identify and differentiate both active and passive elements
2 Analyze the characteristics of different electronic devices such as diodes and
transistors
3 Choose and adapt the required components to construct an amplifier circuit.
4 Employ the acquired knowledge in design and analysis of oscillators

TEXT BOOKS:
1. . David A. Bell ,”Electronic devices and circuits”, Oxford University higher education, 5th
edition 2008.
2. Sedra and smith, “Microelectronic circuits”,7th Ed., Oxford University Press

48
REFERENCES:
0 Balbir Kumar, Shail.B.Jain, “Electronic devices and circuits” PHI learning private limited, 2nd
edition 2014.
1 Thomas L.Floyd, “Electronic devices” Conventional current version, Pearson prentice hall,
10th Edition, 2017.
2 Donald A Neamen, “Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design” Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2003.
3 Robert L.Boylestad, “Electronic devices and circuit theory”, 2002.
4 Robert B. Northrop, “Analysis and Application of Analog Electronic Circuits to Biomedical
Instrumentation”, CRC Press, 2004.

ME8792 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVE:
0 Providing an overview of Power Plants and detailing the role of Mechanical Engineers in their
operation and maintenance.

UNIT I COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS 9

Rankine cycle - improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers, FBC
Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants – Fuel and
ash handling, Draught system, Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration systems.

UNIT II DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER PLANTS 9

Otto, Diesel, Dual & Brayton Cycle - Analysis & Optimisation. Components of Diesel and Gas
Turbine power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated Gasifier based Combined Cycle
systems.

UNIT III NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 9

Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of
Nuclear Reactors : Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR), CANada
Deuterium- Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors.
Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants.

UNIT IV POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY 9

Hydro Electric Power Plants – Classification, Typical Layout and associated components including
Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, Solar Photo Voltaic (SPV), Solar
Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell power systems.

UNIT V ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL

ISSUES OF POWER PLANTS 9
Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection criteria,
relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants. Pollution control
technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power Plants.
49
 TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a thermal power
plant.
CO2 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside a Diesel, Gas
and Combined cycle power plants.
CO3 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside nuclear power
plants.
CO4 Explain the layout, construction and working of the components inside Renewable
energy power plants.
CO5 Explain the applications of power plants while extend their knowledge to power plant
economics and environmental hazards and estimate the costs of electrical energy
production.
TEXT BOOK:
0 Nag. P.K., "Power Plant Engineering", Third Edition, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company
Ltd., 2008.
REFERENCES:
0 El-Wakil. M.M., "Power Plant Technology", Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2010.
1 Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable energy", Open University, Oxford University Press in association
with the Open University, 2004.
2 Thomas C. Elliott, Kao Chen and Robert C. Swanekamp, "Power Plant Engineering", Second
Edition, Standard Handbook of McGraw – Hill, 1998.

EC8311 ELECTRONICS LABORATORY L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 0 0 4 2

0 To enability the students to understand the behavior of semiconductor device based on

experimentation.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
0 Characteristics of Semiconductor diode and Zener diode
1 Characteristics of a NPN Transistor under common emitter , common collector and
common base configurations
2 Characteristics of JFET and draw the equivalent circuit
3 Characteristics of UJT and generation of saw tooth waveforms
4 Design and Frequency response characteristics of a Common Emitter amplifier
5 Characteristics of photo diode & photo transistor, Study of light activated relay circuit
6 Design and testing of RC phase shift and LC oscillators
7 Single Phase half-wave and full wave rectifiers with inductive and capacitive filters
8 Differential amplifiers using FET
0 Study of CRO for frequency and phase measurements

50
0 Realization of passive filters
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 Ability to understand and analyse electronic circuits.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

1. Semiconductor devices like Diode, Zener Diode, NPN Transistors, JFET, UJT, Photo diode,
Photo Transistor
0 Resistors, Capacitors and inductors
1 Necessary digital IC 8
4. Function Generators 10
5. Regulated 3 output Power Supply 5, ± 15V 10
6. CRO 10
7. Storage Oscilloscope 1
0 Bread boards
1 Atleast one demo module each for the listed equipments.
10. Component data sheets to be provided

EE8311 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY-I L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 0 0 4 2

0 To expose the students to the operation of D.C. machines and transformers

and give them experimental skill.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
0 Open circuit and load characteristics of DC shunt generator- critical resistance and critical
speed.
1 Load characteristics of DC compound generator with differential and cumulative
connections.
2 Load test on DC shunt motor.
3 Load test on DC compound motor.
4 Load test on DC series motor.
5 Swinburne’s test and speed control of DC shunt motor.
6 Hopkinson’s test on DC motor – generator set.
7 Load test on single-phase transformer and three phase transformers.
8 Open circuit and short circuit tests on single phase transformer.
0 Sumpner’s test on single phase transformers.
1 Separation of no-load losses in single phase transformer.
12 Study of starters and 3-phase transformers connections.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 Ability to understand and analyze DC Generator
51
 0 Ability to understand and analyze DC Motor
1 Ability to understand and analyse Transformers.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

0 DC Shunt Motor with Loading Arrangement – 3 nos
1 DC Shunt Motor Coupled with Three phase Alternator – 1 No.
2 Single Phase Transformer – 4 nos
3 DC Series Motor with Loading Arrangement – 1 No.
4 DC compound Motor with Loading Arrangement – 1 No.
5 Three Phase Induction Motor with Loading Arrangement – 2 nos
6 Single Phase Induction Motor with Loading Arrangement – 1 No.
7 DC Shunt Motor Coupled With DC Compound Generator – 2 nos
8 DC Shunt Motor Coupled With DC Shunt Motor – 1 No.
9 Tachometer -Digital/Analog – 8 nos

10 Single Phase Auto Transformer – 2 nos

11 Three Phase Auto Transformer – 1 No.

12 Single Phase Resistive Loading Bank – 2 nos
13 Three Phase Resistive Loading Bank. – 2 nos

MA8491 NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C

OBJECTIVES : 4 0 0 4

0 To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.

1 To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals in real life
2 situations.
3 To acquaint the student with understanding of numerical techniques of differentiation and
integration which plays an important role in engineering and technology disciplines.
4 To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary differential
equations.
5 To understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving various types of
partial differential equations.

UNIT ISOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 12

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton Raphson
method - Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss Jordan
method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power
method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.

52
UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 12
Interpolation with unequal intervals - Lagrange's interpolation – Newton’s divided difference
interpolation – Cubic Splines - Difference operators and relations - Interpolation with equal intervals -
Newton’s forward and backward difference formulae.

UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 12

Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials - Numerical integration using
Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 rule – Romberg’s Method - Two point and three point Gaussian
quadrature formulae – Evaluation of double integrals by Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.

UNIT IV INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Single step methods - Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge - Kutta method for solving first order equations - Multi step methods - Milne’s and Adams
- Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order equations.

UNIT V BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL

EQUATIONS 12 Finite difference methods for solving second order two - point linear
boundary value problems - Finite difference techniques for the solution of two dimensional Laplace’s
and Poisson’s equations on rectangular domain – One dimensional heat flow equation by explicit and
implicit (Crank Nicholson) methods – One dimensional wave equation by explicit method.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
0 Understand the basic concepts and techniques of solving algebraic and transcendental
equations.
1 Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation and error approximations in various
intervals in real life situations.
 Apply the numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
0 Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
1 Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.

TEXTBOOKS :
0 Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis", 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
1 Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES :
0 Brian Bradie, "A Friendly Introduction to Numerical Analysis", Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 2007.
1 Gerald. C. F. and Wheatley. P. O., "Applied Numerical Analysis", Pearson Education, Asia, 6th
Edition, New Delhi, 2006.
2 Mathews, J.H. "Numerical Methods for Mathematics, Science and Engineering", 2nd Edition,
Prentice Hall, 1992.
3 Sankara Rao. K., "Numerical Methods for Scientists and Engineers", Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
4 Sastry, S.S, "Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 5th Edition,
2015.

53
 EE8401 ELECTRICAL MACHINES – II L T P C
2 2 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
0 Construction and performance of salient and non – salient type synchronous
generators.
1 Principle of operation and performance of synchronous motor.
2 Construction, principle of operation and performance of induction machines.
3 Starting and speed control of three-phase induction motors.
4 Construction, principle of operation and performance of single phase induction
motors and special machines.
UNIT I SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR 6+6
Constructional details – Types of rotors –winding factors- emf equation – Synchronous
reactance – Armature reaction – Phasor diagrams of non salient pole synchronous
generator connected to infinite bus--Synchronizing and parallel operation – Synchronizing
torque -Change of excitation and mechanical input- Voltage regulation – EMF, MMF, ZPF
and A.S.A methods – steady state power- angle characteristics– Two reaction theory –slip
test -short circuit transients - Capability Curves

UNIT II SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR 6+6

Principle of operation – Torque equation – Operation on infinite bus bars - V and Inverted V
curves – Power input and power developed equations – Starting methods – Current loci for
constant power input, constant excitation and constant power developed-Hunting – natural
frequency of oscillations – damper windings- synchronous condenser.

UNIT III THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR 6+6

Constructional details – Types of rotors –- Principle of operation – Slip –cogging and
crawling- Equivalent circuit – Torque-Slip characteristics - Condition for maximum torque –
Losses and efficiency – Load test - No load and blocked rotor tests - Circle diagram –
Separation of losses – Double cage induction motors –Induction generators – Synchronous
induction motor.

UNIT IV STARTING AND SPEED CONTROL OF THREE PHASE INDUCTION 6+6

MOTOR
Need for starting – Types of starters – DOL, Rotor resistance, Autotransformer and Star-
delta starters – Speed control – Voltage control, Frequency control and pole changing –
Cascaded connection-V/f control – Slip power recovery scheme-Braking of three phase
induction motor: Plugging, dynamic braking and regenerative braking.

UNIT V SINGLE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS AND SPECIAL MACHINES 6+6

Constructional details of single phase induction motor – Double field revolving theory and
operation – Equivalent circuit – No load and blocked rotor test – Performance analysis –
Starting methods of single-phase induction motors – Capacitor-start capacitor run Induction
motor- Shaded pole induction motor - Linear induction motor – Repulsion motor - Hysteresis
motor - AC series motor- Servo motors- Stepper motors - introduction to magnetic levitation
systems.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
54
OUTCOMES:
0 Ability to understand the construction and working principle of
Synchronous Generator
1 Ability to understand MMF curves and armature windings.
2 Ability to acquire knowledge on Synchronous motor.
3 Ability to understand the construction and working principle of Three phase
Induction Motor
4 Ability to understand the construction and working principle of Special Machines
5 Ability to predetermine the performance characteristics of Synchronous Machines.
TEXT BOOKS:
1 A.E. Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, Stephen. D. Umans, ‘Electric Machinery’, Mc Graw
Hill publishing Company Ltd, 2003.
2 Vincent Del Toro, ‘Basic Electric Machines’ Pearson India Education, 2016.
3 Stephen J. Chapman, ‘Electric Machinery Fundamentals’4th edition, McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 2010.
REFERENCES
0 D.P. Kothari and I.J. Nagrath, ‘Electric Machines’, McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Ltd, 2002.
1 P.S. Bhimbhra, ‘Electrical Machinery’, Khanna Publishers, 2003.
2 M.N. Bandyopadhyay, Electrical Machines Theory and Practice, PHI Learning PVT
LTD., New Delhi, 2009.
0 B.R.Gupta, ’Fundamental of Electric Machines’ New age International Publishers,3rd
Edition ,Reprint 2015.
1 Murugesh Kumar, ‘Electric Machines’, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, 2002.
2 Alexander S. Langsdorf, ‘Theory of Alternating-Current Machinery’, McGraw Hill
Publications, 2001.

EE8402 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 3 0 0 3

0 To study the structure of electric power system and to develop expressions for the
computation of transmission line parameters.
1 To obtain the equivalent circuits for the transmission lines based on distance and to
determine voltage regulation and efficiency.
2 To understand the mechanical design of transmission lines and to analyze the
voltage distribution in insulator strings to improve the efficiency.
3 To study the types, construction of cabilitys and methods to improve the efficiency.
4 To study about distribution systems, types of substations, methods of grounding,
EHVAC, HVDC and FACTS.
UNIT I TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS 9
Structure of Power System - Parameters of single and three phase transmission lines with
single and double circuits -Resistance, inductance and capacitance of solid, stranded and
bundled conductors, Symmetrical and unsymmetrical spacing and transposition - application
of self and mutual GMD; skin and proximity effects -Typical configurations, conductor types
and electrical parameters of EHV lines.
55
UNIT II MODELLING AND PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES 9
Performance of Transmission lines - short line, medium line and long line - equivalent
circuits, phasor diagram, attenuation constant, phase constant, surge impedance -
transmission efficiency and voltage regulation, real and reactive power flow in lines - Power
Circle diagrams - Formation of Corona – Critical Voltages – Effect on Line Performance.

UNIT III MECHANICAL DESIGN OF LINES 9

Mechanical design of OH lines – Line Supports –Types of towers – Stress and Sag
Calculation – Effects of Wind and Ice loading. Insulators: Types, voltage distribution in
insulator string, improvement of string efficiency, testing of insulators.

UNIT IV UNDER GROUND CABILITYS 9

Underground cabilitys - Types of cabilitys – Construction of single core and 3 core Cabilitys -
Insulation Resistance – Potential Gradient - Capacitance of Single-core and 3 core cabilitys
- Grading of cabilitys - Power factor and heating of cabilitys– DC cabilitys.

UNIT V DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 9

Distribution Systems – General Aspects – Kelvin’s Law – AC and DC distributions -
Techniques of Voltage Control and Power factor improvement – Distribution Loss –Types of
Substations -Methods of Grounding – Trends in Transmission and Distribution: EHVAC,
HVDC and FACTS (Qualitative treatment only).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 To understand the importance and the functioning of transmission line parameters.
1 To understand the concepts of Lines and Insulators.
2 To acquire knowledge on the performance of Transmission lines.
3 To understand the importance of distribution of the electric power in power system.
4 To acquire knowledge on Underground Cabilitys
5 To become familiar with the function of different components used in Transmission
and Distribution levels of power system and modelling of these components.

TEXT BOOKS:
0 D.P.Kothari, I.J. Nagarath, ‘Power System Engineering’, Mc Graw-Hill Publishing
Company limited, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2008.
0 C.L.Wadhwa, ‘Electrical Power Systems’, New Academic Science Ltd, 2009.
1 S.N. Singh, ‘Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution’, Prentice Hall
of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2011.
REFERENCES
0 B.R.Gupta, ‘Power System Analysis and Design’ S. Chand, New Delhi, Fifth Edition,
2008.
1 Luces M.Fualken berry, Walter Coffer, ‘Electrical Power Distribution and
Transmission’, Pearson Education, 2007.
2 Arun Ingole, "power transmission and distribution" Pearson Education, 2017
3 J.Brian, Hardy and Colin R.Bayliss ‘Transmission and Distribution in Electrical
Engineering’, Newnes; Fourth Edition, 2012.
4 G.Ramamurthy, “Handbook of Electrical power Distribution,” Universities Press,
2013.

56
 0 V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, ‘Principles of power system’, S. Chand & Company Ltd,
New Delhi, 2013

EE8403 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
0 Basic functional elements of instrumentation
1 Fundamentals of electrical and electronic instruments
2 Comparison between various measurement techniques
3 Various storage and display devices
4 Various transducers and the data acquisition systems
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Functional elements of an instrument – Static and dynamic characteristics – Errors in
measurement – Statistical evaluation of measurement data – Standards and calibration-
Principle and types of analog and digital voltmeters, ammeters.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS 9

Principle and types of multi meters – Single and three phase watt meters and energy meters –
Magnetic measurements – Determination of B-H curve and measurements of iron loss –
Instrument transformers – Instruments for measurement of frequency and phase.

UNIT III COMPARATIVE METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS 9

D.C potentiometers, D.C (Wheat stone, Kelvin and Kelvin Double bridge) & A.C bridges
(Maxwell, Anderson and Schering bridges), transformer ratio bridges, self-balancing bridges.
Interference & screening – Multiple earth and earth loops - Electrostatic and electromagnetic
Interference – Grounding techniques.

UNIT IV STORAGE AND DISPLAY DEVICES 9

Magnetic disk and tape – Recorders, digital plotters and printers, CRT display, digital CRO,
LED, LCD & Dot matrix display – Data Loggers.

UNIT V TRANSDUCERS AND DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS 9

Classification of transducers – Selection of transducers – Resistive, capacitive & inductive
Transducers – Piezoelectric, Hall effect, optical and digital transducers – Elements of data
acquisition system – Smart sensors-Thermal Imagers.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 To acquire knowledge on Basic functional elements of instrumentation
1 To understand the concepts of Fundamentals of electrical and electronic instruments
2 Ability to compare between various measurement techniques
3 To acquire knowledge on Various storage and display devices
4 To understand the concepts Various transducers and the data acquisition systems
5 Ability to model and analyze electrical and electronic Instruments and understand
the operational features of display Devices and Data Acquisition System.

57
TEXT BOOKS:
0 A.K. Sawhney, ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation’,
Dhanpat Rai and Co, 2010.
1 J. B. Gupta, ‘A Course in Electronic and Electrical Measurements’, S. K. Kataria & Sons,
Delhi, 2013.
2 Doebelin E.O. and Manik D.N., Measurement Systems – Applications and Design, Special
Indian Edition, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
REFERENCES
0 H.S. Kalsi, ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, McGraw Hill, III Edition 2010.
1 D.V.S. Murthy, ‘Transducers and Instrumentation’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2015.
2 David Bell, ‘ Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements’, Oxford University Press,2013.
3 Martin Reissland, ‘Electrical Measurements’, New Age International (P) Ltd., Delhi, 2001.
4 Alan. S. Morris, Principles of Measurements and Instrumentation, 2nd Edition, Prentice
Hall of India, 2003.

EE8451 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following topics
0 Signal analysis using Op-amp based circuits.
1 Applications of Op-amp.
2 Functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like Timers, PLL circuits, regulator
Circuits.
3 IC fabrication procedure.

UNIT I IC FABRICATION 9
IC classification, fundamental of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, masking and
etching, diffusion of impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging. Fabrication of
diodes, capacitance, resistance, FETs and PV Cell.

UNIT II CHARACTERISTICS OF OPAMP 9

Ideal OP-AMP characteristics, DC characteristics, AC characteristics, differential amplifier;
frequency response of OP-AMP; Basic applications of op -amp – Inverting and Non-
inverting Amplifiers, summer, differentiator and integrator-V/I & I/V converters.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF OPAMP 9

Instrumentation amplifier and its applications for transducer Bridge, Log and Antilog
Amplifiers- Analog multiplier & Divider, first and second order active filters, comparators,
multivibrators, waveform generators, clippers, clampers, peak detector, S/H circuit, D/A
converter (R- 2R ladder and weighted resistor types), A/D converters using opamps.

UNIT IV SPECIAL ICs 9

Functional block, characteristics of 555 Timer and its PWM application - IC-566 voltage
controlled oscillator IC; 565-phase locked loop IC, AD633 Analog multiplier ICs.

58
 UNIT V APPLICATION ICs 9
AD623 Instrumentation Amplifier and its application as load cell weight measurement - IC
voltage regulators –LM78XX, LM79XX; Fixed voltage regulators its application as Linear
power supply - LM317, 723 Variability voltage regulators, switching regulator- SMPS - ICL
8038 function generator IC.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 Ability to acquire knowledge in IC fabrication procedure
1 Ability to analyze the characteristics of Op-Amp
2 To understand the importance of Signal analysis using Op-amp based circuits.
3 Functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like Timers, PLL circuits,
regulator Circuits.
4 To understand and acquire knowledge on the Applications of Op-amp
5 Ability to understand and analyse, linear integrated circuits their Fabrication and
Application.
TEXT BOOKS:
0 David A. Bell, ‘Op-amp & Linear ICs’, Oxford, 2013.
1 D. Roy Choudhary, Sheil B. Jani, ‘Linear Integrated Circuits’, II edition, New Age,
2003.
2 Ramakant A.Gayakward, ‘Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits’, IV edition,
Pearson Education, 2003 / PHI. 2000.
REFERENCES
0 Fiore,”Opamps & Linear Integrated Circuits Concepts & applications”,
Cengage, 2010.
1 Floyd ,Buchla,”Fundamentals of Analog Circuits, Pearson, 2013.
2 Jacob Millman, Christos C.Halkias, ‘Integrated Electronics - Analog and Digital
circuits system’, McGraw Hill, 2003.
3 Robert F.Coughlin, Fredrick F. Driscoll, ‘Op-amp and Linear ICs’, Pearson, 6th
edition,2012.
4 Sergio Franco, ‘Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits’,
Mc Graw Hill, 2016.
5 Muhammad H. Rashid,’ Microelectronic Circuits Analysis and Design’ Cengage
Learning, 2011.

IC8451 CONTROL SYSTEMS LT P C

3204

COURSE OBJECTIVES
0 To understand the use of transfer function models for analysis physical systems and
introduce the control system components.
1 To provide adequate knowledge in the time response of systems and steady state error
analysis.
2 To accord basic knowledge in obtaining the open loop and closed–loop frequency
responses of systems.
3 To introduce stability analysis and design of compensators

59
0 To introduce state variable representation of physical systems

UNIT I SYSTEMS AND REPRESENTATION 9

Basic elements in control systems: – Open and closed loop systems – Electrical analogy of
mechanical and thermal systems – Transfer function – AC and DC servomotors – Block diagram
reduction techniques – Signal flow graphs.

UNIT II TIME RESPONSE 9

Time response: – Time domain specifications – Types of test input – I and II order system response –
Error coefficients – Generalized error series – Steady state error – Root locus construction- Effects of
P, PI, PID modes of feedback control –Time response analysis.

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE 9

Frequency response: – Bode plot – Polar plot – Determination of closed loop response from open
loop response - Correlation between frequency domain and time domain specifications

UNIT IV STABILITY AND COMPENSATOR DESIGN 9

Characteristics equation – Routh Hurwitz criterion – Nyquist stability criterion- Performance criteria –
Effect of Lag, lead and lag-lead compensation on frequency response-Design of Lag, lead and lag-
lead compensator using bode plots.

UNIT V STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9

Concept of state variables – State models for linear and time invariant Systems – Solution of state
and output equation in controllable canonical form – Concepts of controllability and observability.
TOTAL (L: 45+T:30): 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the student should have the :

0 Ability to develop various representations of system based on the knowledge

of Mathematics, Science and Engineering fundamentals.
1 Ability to do time domain and frequency domain analysis of various models of linear
system.
2 Ability to interpret characteristics of the system to develop mathematical model.
3 Ability to design appropriate compensator for the given specifications.
4 Ability to come out with solution for complex control problem.
5 Ability to understand use of PID controller in closed loop system.

TEXT BOOKS
0 Nagarath, I.J. and Gopal, M., “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age International
Publishers, 2017.
1 Benjamin C. Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Wiley, 2014.

REFERENCES
0 Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Pearson, 2015.
1 Richard C.Dorf and Bishop, R.H., “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education,2009.
2 John J.D., Azzo Constantine, H. and Houpis Sttuart, N Sheldon, “Linear Control System
Analysis and Design with MATLAB”, CRC Taylor& Francis Reprint 2009.
3 Rames C.Panda and T. Thyagarajan, “An Introduction to Process Modelling
Identification and Control of Engineers”, Narosa Publishing House, 2017.
4 M.Gopal, “Control System: Principle and design”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
5 NPTEL Video Lecture Notes on “Control Engineering “by Prof. S. D. Agashe, IIT
Bombay.
60
EE8411 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY - II L T P C
OBJECTIVES: 0 0 4 2

0 To expose the students to the operation of synchronous machines and induction

motors and give them experimental skill.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
0 Regulation of three phase alternator by EMF and MMF methods.
1 Regulation of three phase alternator by ZPF and ASA methods.
2 Regulation of three phase salient pole alternator by slip test.
3 Measurements of negative sequence and zero sequence impedance of alternators.
4 V and Inverted V curves of Three Phase Synchronous Motor.
5 Load test on three-phase induction motor.
6 No load and blocked rotor tests on three-phase induction motor (Determination of
equivalent circuit parameters).
7 Separation of No-load losses of three-phase induction motor.
8 Load test on single-phase induction motor.
0 No load and blocked rotor test on single-phase induction motor.
1 Study of Induction motor Starters
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should have the :
0 Ability to understand and analyze EMF and MMF methods
1 Ability to analyze the characteristics of V and Inverted V curves
2 Ability to understand the importance of Synchronous machines
3 Ability to understand the importance of Induction Machines
4 Ability to acquire knowledge on separation of losses

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

0 Synchronous Induction motor 3HP – 1 No.
1 DC Shunt Motor Coupled With Three phase Alternator – 4 nos
2 DC Shunt Motor Coupled With Three phase Slip ring Induction motor – 1 No.
3 Three Phase Induction Motor with Loading Arrangement – 2 nos
4 Single Phase Induction Motor with Loading Arrangement – 2 nos
5 Tachometer -Digital/Analog – 8 nos
6 Single Phase Auto Transformer – 2 nos
7 Three Phase Auto Transformer – 3 nos
8 Single Phase Resistive Loading Bank – 2 nos
9 Three Phase Resistive Loading Bank – 2 nos
10 Capacitor Bank – 1 No.

61
EE8461 LINEAR AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C
OBJECTIVES: LABORATORY 0 0 4 2

0 To learn design, testing and characterizing of circuit behavior with digital and analog
ICs.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
0 Implementation of Boolean Functions, Adder and Subtractor circuits.
1 Code converters: Excess-3 to BCD and Binary to Gray code converter and vice-versa
2 Parity generator and parity checking
3 Encoders and Decoders
4 Counters: Design and implementation of 3-bit modulo counters as synchronous and
Asynchronous types using FF IC’s and specific counter IC.
5 Shift Registers: Design and implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO,
PIPO modes using suitability IC’s.
6 Study of multiplexer and de multiplexer
7 Timer IC application: Study of NE/SE 555 timer in Astability, Monostability operation.
8 Application of Op-Amp: inverting and non-inverting amplifier, Adder, comparator, Integrator
and Differentiator.
0 Voltage to frequency characteristics of NE/ SE 566 IC.
1 Variability Voltage Regulator using IC LM317.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should have the :
0 Ability to understand and implement Boolean Functions.
1 Ability to understand the importance of code conversion
2 Ability to Design and implement 4-bit shift registers
3 Ability to acquire knowledge on Application of Op-Amp
4 Ability to Design and implement counters using specific counter IC.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS: (3 per Batch)

S.No Name of the equipments / Components Quantity Required Remarks

1 Dual ,(0-30V) variability Power Supply 10 -
2 CRO 9 30MHz
3 Digital Multimeter 10 Digital
4 Function Generator 8 1 MHz
5 IC Tester (Analog) 2
6 Bread board 10

62
 7 Computer (PSPICE installed) 1
Consumabilitys (sufficient quantity)
1 IC 741/ IC NE555/566/565
2 Digital IC types
3 LED
4 LM317
5 LM723
6 ICSG3524 / SG3525
7 Transistor – 2N3391
8 Diodes, IN4001,BY126
9 Zener diodes
10 Potentiometer
11 Step-down transformer 230V/12-0-12V
12 Capacitor
13 Resistors 1/4 Watt Assorted
14 Single Strand Wire

EE8412 TECHNICAL SEMINAR LT P C

0021

OBJECTIVES:
0 To encourage the students to study advanced engineering developments
1 To prepare and present technical reports.
2 To encourage the students to use various teaching aids such as overhead
projectors, power point presentation and demonstrative models.

METHOD OF EVALUATION:

During the seminar session each student is expected to prepare and present a topic on
engineering/ technology, for a duration of about 8 to 10 minutes. In a session of three periods
per week, 15 students are expected to present the seminar. Each student is expected to present
atleast twice during the semester and the student is evaluated based on that. At the end of the
semester, he / she can submit a report on his / her topic of seminar and marks are given based
on the report. A Faculty guide is to be allotted and he / she will guide and monitor the progress
of the student and maintain attendance also. Evaluation is 100% internal.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

63
OUTCOMES:
0 Ability to review, prepare and present technological developments
1 Ability to face the placement interviews

EE8501 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 3 0 0 3

0 To model the power system under steady state operating condition

1 To understand and apply iterative techniques for power flow analysis
2 To model and carry out short circuit studies on power system
3 To model and analyze stability problems in power system

UNIT I POWER SYSTEM 9

Need for system planning and operational studies - Power scenario in India - Power system
components – Representation - Single line diagram - per unit quantities - p.u. impedance
diagram - p.u. reactance diagram - Network graph, Bus incidence matrix, Primitive
parameters, Bus admittance matrix from primitive parameters - Representation of off-
nominal transformer - Formation of bus admittance matrix of large power network.

UNIT II POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 9

Bus classification - Formulation of Power Flow problem in polar coordinates - Power flow
solution using Gauss Seidel method - Handling of Voltage controlled buses - Power Flow
Solution by Newton Raphson method.

UNIT III SYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 9

Assumptions in short circuit analysis - Symmetrical short circuit analysis using Thevenin’s
theorem - Bus Impedance matrix building algorithm (without mutual coupling) - Symmetrical
fault analysis through bus impedance matrix - Post fault bus voltages - Fault level - Current
limiting reactors.

UNIT IV UNSYMMETRICAL FAULT ANALYSIS 9

Symmetrical components - Sequence impedances - Sequence networks - Analysis of
unsymmetrical faults at generator terminals: LG, LL and LLG - unsymmetrical fault occurring
at any point in a power system - computation of post fault currents in symmetrical
component and phasor domains.

UNIT V STABILITY ANALYSIS 9

Classification of power system stability – Rotor angle stability - Swing equation - Swing
curve - Power-Angle equation - Equal area criterion - Critical clearing angle and time -
Classical step-by-step solution of the swing equation – modified Euler method.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
0 Ability to model the power system under steady state operating condition
1 Ability to understand and apply iterative techniques for power flow analysis
2 Ability to model and carry out short circuit studies on power system
3 Ability to model and analyze stability problems in power system
64
 0 Ability to acquire knowledge on Fault analysis.
0 Ability to model and understand various power system components and carry
out power flow, short circuit and stability studies.
TEXT BOOKS:
0 John J. Grainger, William D. Stevenson, Jr, ‘Power System Analysis’, Mc Graw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2015.
1 Kothari D.P. and Nagrath I.J., ‘Power System Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, Second Edition, 2008.
2 Hadi Saadat, ‘Power System Analysis’, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 21st reprint, 2010.

REFERENCES
Pai M A, ‘Computer Techniques in Power System Analysis’, Tata Mc Graw-Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi, Second Edition, 2007.
J. Duncan Glover, Mulukutla S.Sarma, Thomas J. Overbye, ‘Power System Analysis &
Design’, Cengage Learning, Fifth Edition, 2012.
Gupta B.R., ‘Power System - Analysis and Design’, S. Chand Publishing, 2001.
Kundur P., ‘Power System Stability and Control’, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 10th reprint, 2010.

EE8551 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LTPC300

3

OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
Architecture of µP8085 & µC 8051
Addressing modes & instruction set of 8085 & 8051.
Need & use of Interrupt structure 8085 & 8051.
Simple applications development with programming 8085 & 8051
UNIT I 8085 PROCESSOR 9
Hardware Architecture, pinouts – Functional Building Blocks of Processor – Memory
organization – I/O ports and data transfer concepts– Timing Diagram – Interrupts.
UNIT II PROGRAMMING OF 8085 PROCESSOR
9
Instruction -format and addressing modes – Assembly language format – Data transfer, data
manipulation& control instructions – Programming: Loop structure with counting & Indexing –
Look up tability - Subroutine instructions - stack.

UNIT III 8051 MICRO CONTROLLER 9

Hardware Architecture, pinouts – Functional Building Blocks of Processor – Memory
organization – I/O ports and data transfer concepts– Timing Diagram – Interrupts- Data
Transfer, Manipulation, Control Algorithms& I/O instructions, Comparison to Programming
concepts with 8085.

65
UNIT IV PERIPHERAL INTERFACING 9
Study on need, Architecture, configuration and interfacing, with ICs: 8255, 8259, 8254,
8279, - A/D and D/A converters &Interfacing with 8085& 8051.
UNIT V MICRO CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING & APPLICATIONS 9
Simple programming exercises- key board and display interface –Control of servo motor-
stepper motor control- Application to automation systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to acquire knowledge in Addressing modes & instruction set of 8085 & 8051.
Ability to need & use of Interrupt structure 8085 & 8051.
Ability to understand the importance of Interfacing
Ability to explain the architecture of Microprocessor and Microcontroller.
Ability to write the assembly language programme.
Ability to develop the Microprocessor and Microcontroller based applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
Sunil Mathur &Jeebananda Panda, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, PHI Learning
Pvt. Ltd, 2016.
R.S. Gaonkar, ‘Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Application’, with 8085,
Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, R.D.Kinely ‘The 8051 Micro Controller and
Embedded Systems’, PHI Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2003.
REFERENCES
Krishna Kant, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, Eastern Company Edition, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
B.RAM,” Computer Fundamentals Architecture and Organization” New age International
Private Limited, Fifth edition, 2017.
Soumitra Kumar Mandal, Microprocessor & Microcontroller Architecture,
Programming & Interfacing using 8085,8086,8051,McGraw Hill Edu,2013.
Ajay V.Deshmukh, ‘Microcontroller Theory &Applications’, McGraw Hill Edu,2016
Douglas V.Hall, ‘Microprocessor and Interfacing’, McGraw Hill Edu,2016.

EE8552 POWER ELECTRONICS L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 3 0 0 3

To impart knowledge on the following Topics

Different types of power semiconductor devices and their switching
Operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers
Operation, switching techniques and basics topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.
Different modulation techniques of pulse width modulated inverters and to understand
harmonic reduction methods.
Operation of AC voltage controller and various configurations.

66
UNIT I POWER SEMI-CONDUCTOR DEVICES 9
Study of switching devices, SCR, TRIAC, GTO, BJT, MOSFET, IGBT and IGCT- Static
characteristics: SCR, MOSFET and IGBT - Triggering and commutation circuit for SCR-
Introduction to Driver and snubber circuits.

UNIT II PHASE-CONTROLLED CONVERTERS 9

2-pulse, 3-pulse and 6-pulseconverters– performance parameters –Effect of source
inductance–– Firing Schemes for converter–Dual converters, Applications-light dimmer,
Excitation system, Solar PV systems.

UNIT III DC TO DC CONVERTERS 9

Step-down and step -up chopper-control strategy– Introduction to types of choppers-A, B, C,
D and E -Switched mode regulators- Buck, Boost, Buck- Boost regulator, Introduction to
Resonant Converters, Applications-Battery operated vehicles.

UNIT IV INVERTERS 9
0 0
Single phase and three phase voltage source inverters (both120 mode and 180 mode)–
Voltage& harmonic control--PWM techniques: Multiple PWM, Sinusoidal PWM, modified
sinusoidal PWM – Introduction to space vector modulation –Current source inverter,
Applications-Induction heating, UPS.

UNIT V AC TO AC CONVERTERS 9
Single phase and Three phase AC voltage controllers–Control strategy- Power Factor
Control – Multistage sequence control -single phase and three phase cyclo converters –
Introduction to Matrix converters, Applications –welding .

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to analyse AC-AC and DC-DC and DC-AC converters.
Ability to choose the converters for real time applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
M.H. Rashid, ‘Power Electronics: Circuits, Devices and Applications’, Pearson
Education, Third Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
P.S.Bimbra “Power Electronics” Khanna Publishers, third Edition, 2003.
Ashfaq Ahmed ‘Power Electronics for Technology’, Pearson Education, Indian reprint,
2003.
REFERENCES
Joseph Vithayathil,’ Power Electronics, Principles and Applications’, McGraw Hill Series,
6th Reprint, 2013.
Philip T. Krein, “Elements of Power Electronics” Oxford University Press, 2004 Edition.
L. Umanand, “Power Electronics Essentials and Applications”, Wiley, 2010.
Ned Mohan Tore. M. Undel and, William. P. Robbins, ‘Power Electronics: Converters,
Applications and Design’, John Wiley and sons, third edition, 2003.
S.Rama Reddy, ‘Fundamentals of Power Electronics’, Narosa Publications, 2014.
M.D. Singh and K.B. Khanchandani, “Power Electronics,” Mc Graw Hill India, 2013.
JP Agarwal,” Power Electronic Systems: Theory and Design” 1e, Pearson Education,
2002.

67
EE8591 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C
2 2 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Signals and systems & their mathematical representation.
Discrete time systems.
Transformation techniques & their computation.
Filters and their design for digital implementation.
Programmability digital signal processor & quantization effects.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6+6
Classification of systems: Continuous, discrete, linear, causal, stability, dynamic, recursive,
time variance; classification of signals: continuous and discrete, energy and power;
mathematical representation of signals; spectral density; sampling techniques, quantization,
quantization error, Nyquist rate, aliasing effect.

UNIT II DISCRETE TIME SYSTEM ANALYSIS 6+6

Z-transform and its properties, inverse z-transforms; difference equation – Solution by z-
transform, application to discrete systems - Stability analysis, frequency response –
Convolution – Discrete Time Fourier transform , magnitude and phase representation.
UNIT III DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM & COMPUTATION 6+6
Discrete Fourier Transform- properties, magnitude and phase representation -
Computation of DFT using FFT algorithm – DIT &DIF using radix 2 FFT – Butterfly
structure.
UNIT IV DESIGN OF DIGITAL FILTERS 6+6
FIR & IIR filter realization – Parallel & cascade forms. FIR design: Windowing Techniques –
Need and choice of windows – Linear phase characteristics. Analog filter design –
Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations; IIR Filters, digital design using impulse
invariant and bilinear transformation Warping, pre warping.
UNIT V DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 6+6
Introduction – Architecture – Features – Addressing Formats – Functional modes -
Introduction to Commercial DS Processors.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand the importance of Fourier transform, digital filters and DS
Processors.
Ability to acquire knowledge on Signals and systems & their mathematical
representation.
Ability to understand and analyze the discrete time systems.
Ability to analyze the transformation techniques & their computation.
Ability to understand the types of filters and their design for digital implementation.
Ability to acquire knowledge on programmability digital signal processor & quantization
effects.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. J.G. Proakis and D.G. Manolakis, ‘Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms

68
 and Applications’, Pearson Education, New Delhi, PHI. 2003.
S.K. Mitra, ‘Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach’, McGraw Hill Edu,
2013.
Lonnie C.Ludeman ,”Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing”,Wiley,2013
REFERENCES
Poorna Chandra S, Sasikala. B ,Digital Signal Processing, Vijay Nicole/TMH,2013.
Robert Schilling & Sandra L.Harris, Introduction to Digital Signal Processing using
Matlab”, Cengage Learning,2014.
B.P.Lathi, ‘Principles of Signal Processing and Linear Systems’, Oxford University Press,
2010 3. Taan S. ElAli, ‘Discrete Systems and Digital Signal Processing with Mat Lab’,
CRC Press, 2009.
SenM.kuo, woonseng…s.gan, “Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Implementations &
Applications, Pearson,2013
DimitrisG.Manolakis, Vinay K. Ingle, applied Digital Signal
Processing,Cambridge,2012

CS8392 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LTPC

OBJECTIVES: 3003

To understand Object Oriented Programming concepts and basic characteristics of Java

To know the principles of packages, inheritance and interfaces
To define exceptions and use I/O streams
To develop a java application with threads and generics classes
To design and build simple Graphical User Interfaces

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OOP AND JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 10

Object Oriented Programming - Abstraction – objects and classes - Encapsulation- Inheritance -
Polymorphism- OOP in Java – Characteristics of Java – The Java Environment - Java Source File
-Structure – Compilation. Fundamental Programming Structures in Java – Defining classes in Java
– constructors, methods -access specifiers - static members -Comments, Data Types, Variables,
Operators, Control Flow, Arrays , Packages - JavaDoc comments.

UNIT II INHERITANCE AND INTERFACES 9

Inheritance – Super classes- sub classes –Protected members – constructors in sub classes- the
Object class – abstract classes and methods- final methods and classes – Interfaces – defining an
interface, implementing interface, differences between classes and interfaces and extending
interfaces - Object cloning -inner classes, Array Lists - Strings

UNIT III EXCEPTION HANDLING AND I/O 9

Exceptions - exception hierarchy - throwing and catching exceptions – built-in exceptions, creating
own exceptions, Stack Trace Elements. Input / Output Basics – Streams – Byte streams and
Character streams – Reading and Writing Console – Reading and Writing Files

UNIT IV MULTITHREADING AND GENERIC PROGRAMMING 8

Differences between multi-threading and multitasking, thread life cycle, creating threads,

69
synchronizing threads, Inter-thread communication, daemon threads, thread groups. Generic
Programming – Generic classes – generic methods – Bounded Types – Restrictions and Limitations.

UNIT V EVENT DRIVEN PROGRAMMING 9

Graphics programming - Frame – Components - working with 2D shapes - Using color, fonts, and
images - Basics of event handling - event handlers - adapter classes - actions - mouse events -
AWT event hierarchy - Introduction to Swing – layout management - Swing Components – Text
Fields , Text Areas – Buttons- Check Boxes – Radio Buttons – Lists- choices- Scrollbars – Windows
–Menus – Dialog Boxes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
Develop Java programs using OOP principles
Develop Java programs with the concepts inheritance and interfaces
Build Java applications using exceptions and I/O streams
Develop Java applications with threads and generics classes
Develop interactive Java programs using swings
TEXT BOOKS
Herbert Schildt, “Java The complete reference”, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.

Cay S. Horstmann, Gary cornell, “Core Java Volume –I Fundamentals”, 9th Edition, Prentice Hall,
2013.
REFERENCES
Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, “Java SE 8 for programmers”, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2015.
Steven Holzner, “Java 2 Black book”, Dreamtech press, 2011.
Timothy Budd, “Understanding Object-oriented programming with Java”, Updated Edition,
Pearson Education, 2000.

EE8511 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 0 0 4 2

To provide knowledge on analysis and design of control system along with basics of
instrumentation.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
CONTROLSYSTEMS:
P, PI and PID controllers
Stability Analysis
Modeling of Systems – Machines, Sensors and Transducers
Design of Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead Compensators
Position Control Systems
Synchro-Transmitter- Receiver and Characteristics
Simulation of Control Systems by Mathematical development tools.

70
 INSTRUMENTATION:
Bridge Networks –AC and DC Bridges
Dynamics of Sensors/Transducers

(a) Temperature (b) pressure (c) Displacement (d) Optical (e) Strain ( f) Flow
Power and Energy Measurement
Signal Conditioning
Instrumentation Amplifier
Analog – Digital and Digital –Analog converters (ADC and DACs)
Process Simulation
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand control theory and apply them to electrical engineering problems.
Ability to analyze the various types of converters.
Ability to design compensators
Ability to understand the basic concepts of bridge networks.
Ability to the basics of signal conditioning circuits.
Ability to study the simulation packages.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

CONTROLSYSTEMS:
PID controller simulation and learner kit – 1 No.
Digital storage Oscilloscope for capturing transience- 1 No

2 Personal Computer with control

system simulation packages - 10 Nos
DC motor –Generator test set-up for evaluation of motor parameters
CRO 30MHz – 1 No.
2MHz Function Generator – 1No.
Position Control Systems Kit (with manual) – 1 No., Tacho Generator Coupling set
AC Synchro transmitter& receiver – 1No.
Sufficient number of Digital multi meters, speed and torque sensors

INSTRUMENTATION:
R, L, C Bridge kit (with manual)
a) Electric heater – 1No.
Thermometer – 1No.Thermistor (silicon type) RTD nickel type – 1No.

30 psi Pressure chamber (complete set) – 1No. Current generator (0 – 20mA) Air foot
pump – 1 No. (with necessary connecting tubes)

LVDT20mm core length movability type – 1No. CRO 30MHz – 1No.

Optical sensor – 1 No. Light source

Strain Gauge Kit with Handy lever beam – 1No.

71
 100gm weights – 10 nos
f) Flow measurement Trainer kit – 1 No.
(1/2 HP Motor, Water tank, Digital Milliammeter, complete set)
Single phase Auto transformer – 1No. Watt-hour meter (energy meter) – 1No. Ammeter
Voltmeter Rheostat Stop watch
Connecting wires (3/20)
IC Transistor kit – 1No.
Instrumentation Amplifier kit-1 No
Analog – Digital and Digital –Analog converters (ADC and DACs)- 1 No

HS8581 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION LTPC

0021

OBJECTIVES: The course aims to:

Enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students
Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
Make them Employability Graduates
Develop their confidence and help them attend interviews successfully.

UNIT I
Introduction to Soft Skills-- Hard skills & soft skills - employability and career Skills—Grooming as a
professional with values—Time Management—General awareness of Current Affairs

UNIT II
Self-Introduction-organizing the material - Introducing oneself to the audience – introducing the
topic – answering questions – individual presentation practice–– presenting the visuals effectively –
5 minute presentations

UNIT III
Introduction to Group Discussion— Participating in group discussions – understanding group
dynamics - brainstorming the topic -– questioning and clarifying –GD strategies- activities to
improve GD skills

UNIT IV
Interview etiquette – dress code – body language – attending job interviews– telephone/skype
interview -one to one interview &panel interview – FAQs related to job interviews

UNIT V
Recognizing differences between groups and teams- managing time-managing stress- networking
professionally- respecting social protocols-understanding career management-developing a long-
term career plan-making career changes.

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES: At the end of the course Learners will be ability to:

Make effective presentations

72
 Participate confidently in Group Discussions.
Attend job interviews and be successful in them.
Develop adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace

Recommended Software

Globearena
Win English

REFERENCES:
Butterfield, Jeff Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students,. OrientBalckSwan: Hyderabad,
2016.
E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient Blackswan:
Hyderabad, 2015
Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2014
S. Hariharanetal. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.

CS8383 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LT P C

LABORATORY 0042

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To build software development skills using java programming for real-world applications.
To understand and apply the concepts of classes, packages, interfaces, arraylist, exception
handling and file processing.
To develop applications using generic programming and event handling.
List of experiments
Develop a Java application to generate Electricity bill. Create a class with the following members:
Consumer no., consumer name, previous month reading, current month reading, type
of EB connection(i.e domestic or commercial). Compute the bill amount using the following tariff.
If the type of the EB connection is domestic, calculate the amount to be paid as follows:
 First 100 units - Rs. 1 per unit
 101-200 units - Rs. 2.50 per unit
201 -500 units - Rs. 4 per unit
 > 501 units - Rs. 6 per unit
If the type of the EB connection is commercial, calculate the amount to be paid as follows:
 First 100 units - Rs. 2 per unit
 101-200 units - Rs. 4.50 per unit
201 -500 units - Rs. 6 per unit
 > 501 units - Rs. 7 per unit
Develop a java application to implement currency converter (Dollar to INR, EURO to INR, Yen to INR
and vice versa), distance converter (meter to KM, miles to KM and vice versa) , time converter
(hours to minutes, seconds and vice versa) using packages.
Develop a java application with Employee class with Emp_name, Emp_id, Address, Mail_id,
Mobile_no as members. Inherit the classes, Programmer, Assistant Professor, Associate
Professor and Professor from employee class. Add Basic Pay (BP) as the member of all the

73
 inherited classes with 97% of BP as DA, 10 % of BP as HRA, 12% of BP as PF, 0.1% of BP for
staff club fund. Generate pay slips for the employees with their gross and net salary.
Design a Java interface for ADT Stack. Implement this interface using array. Provide necessary
exception handling in both the implementations.
Write a program to perform string operations using ArrayList. Write functions for the following

Append - add at end

Insert – add at particular index
Search
List all string starts with given letter
Write a Java Program to create an abstract class named Shape that contains two integers and an
empty method named print Area(). Provide three classes named Rectangle, Triangle and Circle
such that each one of the classes extends the class Shape. Each one of the classes contains
only the method print Area () that prints the area of the given shape.
Write a Java program to implement user defined exception handling.
Write a Java program that reads a file name from the user, displays information about whether the
file exists, whether the file is readable, or writable, the type of file and the length of the file in
bytes.
Write a java program that implements a multi-threaded application that has three threads. First
thread generates a random integer every 1 second and if the value is even, second thread
computes the square of the number and prints. If the value is odd, the third thread will print the
value of cube of the number.
Write a java program to find the maximum value from the given type of elements using a generic
function.
Design a calculator using event-driven programming paradigm of Java with the following options.

Decimal manipulations
Scientific manipulations
Develop a mini project for any application using Java concepts.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
Develop and implement Java programs for simple applications that make use of classes,
packages and interfaces.
Develop and implement Java programs with arraylist, exception handling and multithreading .
Design applications using file processing, generic programming and event handling.

74
EE8601 SOLID STATE DRIVES L T P C
3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
Steady state operation and transient dynamics of a motor load system.
Analyze the operation of the converter/chopper fed dc drive, both qualitatively and quantitatively.
Operation and performance of AC motor drives.
Analyze and design the current and speed controllers for a closed loop solid state DC motor drive.

UNIT I DRIVE CHARACTERISTICS 9

Electric drive – Equations governing motor load dynamics – steady state stability – multi quadrant
Dynamics: acceleration, deceleration, starting & stopping – typical load torque characteristics –
Selection of motor.

UNIT II CONVERTER / CHOPPER FED DC MOTOR DRIVE 9

Steady state analysis of the single and three phase converter fed separately excited DC motor
drive– continuous conduction – Time ratio and current limit control – 4 quadrant operation of
converter / chopper fed drive-Applications.

UNIT III INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES 9

Stator voltage control–V/f control– Rotor Resistance control-qualitative treatment of slip power
recovery drives-closed loop control–– vector control- Applications.

UNIT IV SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES 9

V/f control and self-control of synchronous motor: Margin angle control and power factor control-
Three phase voltage/current source fed synchronous motor- Applications.

UNIT V DESIGN OF CONTROLLERS FOR DRIVES 9

Transfer function for DC motor / load and converter – closed loop control with Current and
speed feedback–armature voltage control and field weakening mode – Design of controllers;
current controller and speed controller- converter selection and characteristics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand and suggest a converter for solid state drive.
Ability to select suitability drive for the given application.
Ability to study about the steady state operation and transient dynamics of a motor load system.
Ability to analyze the operation of the converter/chopper fed dc drive.
Ability to analyze the operation and performance of AC motor drives.
Ability to analyze and design the current and speed controllers for a closed loop solid state
DC motor drive.
TEXT BOOKS:
Gopal K.Dubey, Fundamentals of Electrical Drives, Narosa Publishing House, 1992.
Bimal K.Bose. Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives, Pearson Education, 2002.
R.Krishnan, Electric Motor & Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control, Pearson, 2001.

REFERENCES
Vedam Subramanyam, “ Electric Drives Concepts and Applications ”, 2e, McGraw Hill, 2016
75
 Shaahin Felizadeh, “Electric Machines and Drives”, CRC Press (Taylor and Francis Group), 2013.
John Hindmarsh and Alasdain Renfrew, “Electrical Machines and Drives System,” Elsevier 2012.
Theodore Wildi, “ Electrical Machines ,Drives and power systems ,6th edition, Pearson Education ,
2015
N.K. De., P.K. SEN” Electric drives” PHI, 2012.

EE8602 PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 3 0 0 3

To impart knowledge on the following Topics

Causes of abnormal operating conditions (faults, lightning and switching surges) of the
apparatus and system.
Characteristics and functions of relays and protection schemes.
Apparatus protection, static and numerical relays
Functioning of circuit breaker

UNIT I PROTECTION SCHEMES 9

Principles and need for protective schemes – nature and causes of faults – types of faults – Methods
of Grounding - Zones of protection and essential qualities of protection – Protection scheme

UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAYS 9

Operating principles of relays - the Universal relay – Torque equation – R-X diagram –
Electromagnetic Relays – Over current, Directional, Distance, Differential, Negative sequence and
Under frequency relays.

UNIT III APPARATUS PROTECTION 9

Current transformers and Potential transformers and their applications in protection schemes -
Protection of transformer, generator, motor, bus bars and transmission line.

UNIT IV STATIC RELAYS AND NUMERICAL PROTECTION 9

Static relays – Phase, Amplitude Comparators – Synthesis of various relays using Static
comparators – Block diagram of Numerical relays – Over current protection, transformer differential
protection, distant protection of transmission lines.

UNIT V CIRCUIT BREAKERS 9

Physics of arcing phenomenon and arc interruption - DC and AC circuit breaking – re-striking
voltage and recovery voltage - rate of rise of recovery voltage - resistance switching - current
chopping - interruption of capacitive current - Types of circuit breakers – air blast, air break, oil,
SF6, MCBs, MCCBs and vacuum circuit breakers – comparison of different circuit breakers –
Rating and selection of Circuit breakers.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand and analyze Electromagnetic and Static Relays.
Ability to suggest suitability circuit breaker.
Ability to find the causes of abnormal operating conditions of the apparatus and system.
76
 Ability to analyze the characteristics and functions of relays and protection schemes.
Ability to study about the apparatus protection, static and numerical relays.
Ability to acquire knowledge on functioning of circuit breaker.

TEXT BOOKS:
Sunil S.Rao, ‘Switchgear and Protection’, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008.
B.Rabindranath and N.Chander, ‘Power System Protection and Switchgear’, New Age
International (P) Ltd., First Edition 2011.
Arun Ingole, ‘Switch Gear and Protection’ Pearson Education, 2017.
REFERENCES
BadriRam ,B.H. Vishwakarma, ‘Power System Protection and Switchgear’, New Age
InternationalPvt Ltd Publishers, Second Edition 2011.
Y.G.Paithankar and S.R.Bhide, ‘Fundamentals of power system protection’, Second
Edition,Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.
C.L.Wadhwa, ‘Electrical Power Systems’, 6th Edition, New Age International (P) Ltd., 2010
RavindraP.Singh, ‘Switchgear and Power System Protection’, PHI Learning Private Ltd.,
NewDelhi, 2009.
VK Metha,” Principles of Power Systems” S. Chand, 2005.

Bhavesh Bhalja, R.P. Maheshwari, Nilesh G. Chotani,’Protection and Switchgear’ Oxford

University Press, 2011.

EE8691 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
Building Blocks of Embedded System
Various Embedded Development Strategies
Bus Communication in processors, Input/output interfacing.
Various processor scheduling algorithms.
Basics of Real time operating system and example tutorials to discuss on one real time operating
system tool.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to Embedded Systems –Structural units in Embedded processor , selection of
processor & memory devices- DMA – Memory management methods- Timer and Counting
devices, Watchdog Timer, Real Time Clock, In circuit emulator, Target Hardware Debugging.

UNIT II EMBEDDED NETWORKING 9

Embedded Networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports & Buses– Serial Bus communication
protocols RS232 standard – RS422 – RS 485 - CAN Bus -Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) – Inter
Integrated Circuits (I2C) –need for device drivers.
UNIT III EMBEDDED FIRMWARE DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 9
Embedded Product Development Life Cycle- objectives, different phases of EDLC, Modelling of
EDLC; issues in Hardware-software Co-design, Data Flow Graph, state machine model,
77
Sequential Program Model, concurrent Model, object oriented Model.

UNIT IV RTOS BASED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Introduction to basic concepts of RTOS- Task, process & threads, interrupt routines in RTOS,
Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Preemptive and non-preemptive scheduling, Task
communication shared memory, message passing-, Inter process Communication –
synchronization between processes-semaphores, Mailbox, pipes, priority inversion, priority
inheritance.

UNIT V EMBEDDED SYSTEM APPLICATION AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Case Study of Washing Machine- Automotive Application- Smart card System Application-ATM
machine –Digital camera
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand and analyze Embedded systems.
Ability to suggest an embedded system for a given application.
Ability to operate various Embedded Development Strategies
Ability to study about the bus Communication in processors.
Ability to acquire knowledge on various processor scheduling algorithms.
Ability to understand basics of Real time operating system.
TEXT BOOKS:
Peckol, “Embedded system Design”, John Wiley & Sons,2010
Lyla B Das,” Embedded Systems-An Integrated Approach”, Pearson, 2013
Shibu. K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, 2e, Mc graw Hill, 2017.
REFERENCES
Raj Kamal, ‘Embedded System-Architecture, Programming, Design’, Mc Graw Hill, 2013.
C.R.Sarma, “Embedded Systems Engineering”, University Press (India) Pvt. Ltd, 2013.
Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, Elsevier, 2006.
Han-Way Huang, “Embedded system Design Using C8051”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
Rajib Mall “Real-Time systems Theory and Practice” Pearson Education, 2007.

EE8661 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES LABORATORY L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 0 0 4 2

To provide hands on experience with power electronic converters and testing.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Gate Pulse Generation using R, RC and UJT.
Characteristics of SCR and TRIAC
Characteristics of MOSFET and IGBT
AC to DC half controlled converter
AC to DC fully controlled Converter
Step down and step up MOSFET based choppers
IGBT based single phase PWM inverter
78
 IGBT based three phase PWM inverter
AC Voltage controller
Switched mode power converter.
Simulation of PE circuits (1Φ & 3Φ semi converters, 1Φ & 3Φ full converters, DC-DC
converters, AC voltage controllers).
Characteristics of GTO & IGCT.
Characteristics of PMBLDC motor
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to practice and understand converter and inverter circuits and apply software for
engineering problems.
Ability to experiment about switching characteristics various switches.
Ability to analyze about AC to DC converter circuits.
Ability to analyze about DC to AC circuits.
Ability to acquire knowledge on AC to AC converters
Ability to acquire knowledge on simulation software.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

Device characteristics(for SCR, MOSFET, TRIAC,GTO,IGCT and IGBT kit with built-in / discrete
power supply and meters) - 2 each
SinglephaseSCRbasedhalfcontrolledconverterandfullycontrolledconverteralong with built-
in/separate/firing circuit/module and meter – 2 each
MOSFET based step up and step down choppers (Built in/ Discrete) – 1 each

IGBT based single phase PWM inverter module/Discrete Component – 2

IGBT based three phase PWM inverter module/Discrete Component – 2

Switched mode power converter module/Discrete Component – 2

SCR &TRIAC based 1 phase AC controller along with lamp or rheostat load - 2
Cyclo converter kit with firing module – 1
Dual regulated DC power supply with common ground
Cathode ray Oscilloscope –10
Isolation Transformer – 5
Single phase Auto transformer –3
Components (Inductance, Capacitance ) 3 set for each
Multimeter – 5
LCR meter – 3
Rheostats of various ranges – 2 sets of 10 value
Work tabilitys – 10
DC and AC meters of required ranges – 20
Component data sheets to be provided
79
EE8681 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P C
OBJECTIVES: LABORATORY 0 0 4 2

To provide training on programming of microprocessors and microcontrollers

and understand the interface requirements.
To simulate various microprocessors and microcontrollers using KEIL or Equivalent
simulator.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Simple arithmetic operations: addition / subtraction / multiplication / division.
Programming with control instructions:
Ascending / Descending order, Maximum / Minimum of numbers.
Programs using Rotate instructions.
Hex / ASCII / BCD code conversions.
Interface Experiments: with 8085
A/D Interfacing. & D/A Interfacing.
Traffic light controller.
I/O Port / Serial communication
Programming Practices with Simulators/Emulators/open source
Read a key ,interface display
Demonstration of basic instructions with 8051 Micro controller execution, including:
Conditional jumps & looping
Calling subroutines.
Programming I/O Port and timer of 8051
study on interface with A/D & D/A
Study on interface with DC & AC motors
10 Application hardware development using embedded processors.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand and apply computing platform and software for engineering problems.
Ability to programming logics for code conversion.
Ability to acquire knowledge on A/D and D/A.
Ability to understand basics of serial communication.
Ability to understand and impart knowledge in DC and AC motor interfacing.
Ability to understand basics of software simulators.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

Sl.No. Description of Equipment Quantity required

1. 8085 Microprocessor Trainer with Power Supply 15
2. 8051 Micro Controller Trainer Kit with power 15
supply
3. 8255 Interface boards 5
4. 8251 Interface boards 5

80
 5. 8259 Interface boards 5
6. 8279 Keyboard / Display Interface boards 5
7. 8254 timer/ counters 5
8. ADC and DAC cards 5
9. AC & DC motor with Controller s 5
10. Traffic Light Control Systems 5

EE8611 MINI PROJECT LT P C

0042

OBJECTIVES:
To develop their own innovative prototype of ideas.
To train the students in preparing mini project reports and examination.

The students in a group of 5 to 6 works on a topic approved by the head of the department
and prepares a comprehensive mini project report after completing the work to the
satisfaction. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a minimum of two reviews. The
review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A mini project report is
required at the end of the semester. The mini project work is evaluated based on oral
presentation and the mini project report jointly by external and internal examiners constituted
by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the mini project work students will be in a position to take up their final year
project work and find solution by formulating proper methodology.

EE8701 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
Various types of over voltages in power system and protection methods.
Generation of over voltages in laboratories.
Measurement of over voltages.
Nature of Breakdown mechanism in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics.
Testing of power apparatus and insulation coordination
UNIT I OVER VOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 9
Causes of over voltages and its effects on power system – Lightning, switching surges and
temporary over voltages, Corona and its effects – Bewley lattice diagram- Protection
against over voltages.

81
UNIT II DIELECTRIC BREAKDOWN 9
Properties of Dielectric materials - Gaseous breakdown in uniform and non-uniform fields –
Corona discharges – Vacuum breakdown – Conduction and breakdown in pure and
commercial liquids, Maintenance of oil Quality – Breakdown mechanisms in solid and
composite dielectrics- Applications of insulating materials in electrical equipments.

UNIT III GENERATION OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9

Generation of High DC voltage: Rectifiers, voltage multipliers, vandigraff generator:
generation of high impulse voltage: single and multistage Marx circuits – generation of high
AC voltages: cascaded transformers, resonant transformer and tesla coil- generation of
switching surges – generation of impulse currents - Triggering and control of impulse
generators.

UNIT IV MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND HIGH CURRENTS 9

High Resistance with series ammeter – Dividers, Resistance, Capacitance and Mixed
dividers - Peak Voltmeter, Generating Voltmeters - Capacitance Voltage Transformers,
Electrostatic Voltmeters – Sphere Gaps - High current shunts- Digital techniques in high
voltage measurement.

UNIT V HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING & INSULATION COORDINATION 9

High voltage testing of electrical power apparatus as per International and Indian standards
– Power frequency, impulse voltage and DC testing of Insulators, circuit breakers, bushing,
isolators and transformers- Insulation Coordination& testing of cabilitys.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand Transients in power system.
Ability to understand Generation and measurement of high voltage.
Ability to understand High voltage testing.
Ability to understand various types of over voltages in power system.
Ability to measure over voltages.
Ability to test power apparatus and insulation coordination
TEXT BOOKS:
S.Naidu and V. Kamaraju, ‘High Voltage Engineering’, Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition,
2013.
E. Kuffel and W.S. Zaengl, J.Kuffel, ‘High voltage Engineering fundamentals’,
Newnes Second Edition Elsevier , New Delhi, 2005.
C.L. Wadhwa, ‘High voltage Engineering’, New Age International Publishers, Third Edition,
2010.

REFERENCES
L.L. Alston, ‘High Voltage Technology’, Oxford University Press, First Indian Edition, 2011.
Mazen Abdel – Salam, Hussein Anis, Ahdab A-Morshedy, Roshday Radwan, High Voltage
Engineering – Theory &Practice, Second Edition Marcel Dekker, Inc., 2010.
Subir Ray,’ An Introduction to High Voltage Engineering’ PHI Learning Private
Limited, New Delhi, Second Edition, 2013.

82
 EE8702 POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following topics
Significance of power system operation and control.
Real power-frequency interaction and design of power-frequency controller.
Reactive power-voltage interaction and the control actions to be implemented for
maintaining the voltage profile against varying system load.
Economic operation of power system.
SCADA and its application for real time operation and control of power systems

UNIT I PRELIMINARIES ON POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND 9

CONTROL
Power scenario in Indian grid – National and Regional load dispatching centers –
requirements of good power system - necessity of voltage and frequency regulation - real
power vs frequency and reactive power vs voltage control loops - system load variation, load
curves and basic concepts of load dispatching - load forecasting - Basics of speed
governing mechanisms and modeling - speed load characteristics - regulation of two
generators in parallel.

UNIT II REAL POWER - FREQUENCY CONTROL 9

Load Frequency Control (LFC) of single area system-static and dynamic analysis of
uncontrolled and controlled cases - LFC of two area system - tie line modeling - block
diagram representation of two area system - static and dynamic analysis - tie line with
frequency bias control – state variability model - integration of economic dispatch control
with LFC.

UNIT III REACTIVE POWER – VOLTAGE CONTROL 9

Generation and absorption of reactive power - basics of reactive power control – Automatic
Voltage Regulator (AVR) – brushless AC excitation system – block diagram representation
of AVR loop - static and dynamic analysis – stability compensation – voltage drop in
transmission line - methods of reactive power injection - tap changing transformer, SVC
(TCR + TSC) and STATCOM for voltage control.

UNIT IV ECONOMIC OPERATION OF POWER SYSTEM 9

Statement of economic dispatch problem - input and output characteristics of thermal plant -
incremental cost curve - optimal operation of thermal units without and with transmission
losses (no derivation of transmission loss coefficients) - base point and participation factors
method - statement of unit commitment (UC) problem - constraints on UC problem - solution
of UC problem using priority list – special aspects of short term and long term hydrothermal
problems.

UNIT V COMPUTER CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEMS 9

Need of computer control of power systems-concept of energy control centers and functions
– PMU - system monitoring, data acquisition and controls - System hardware configurations
- SCADA and EMS functions - state estimation problem – measurements and errors -
weighted least square estimation - various operating states - state transition diagram.

83
 TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand the day-to-day operation of electric power system.
Ability to analyze the control actions to be implemented on the system to meet the
minute-to-minute variation of system demand.
Ability to understand the significance of power system operation and control.
Ability to acquire knowledge on real power-frequency interaction.
Ability to understand the reactive power-voltage interaction.
Ability to design SCADA and its application for real time operation.

TEXT BOOKS:
Olle.I.Elgerd, ‘Electric Energy Systems theory - An introduction’, McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 34th reprint, 2010.
Allen. J. Wood and Bruce F. Wollen berg, ‘Power Generation, Operation and Control’,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2016.
Abhijit Chakrabarti and Sunita Halder, ‘Power System Analysis Operation and Control’,
PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Third Edition, 2010.

REFERENCES
Kothari D.P. and Nagrath I.J., ‘Power System Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
Second Edition, 2008.
Hadi Saadat, ‘Power System Analysis’, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 21st
reprint, 2010.
Kundur P., ‘Power System Stability and Control, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 10th reprint, 2010.

EE8703 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
Awareness about renewable Energy Sources and technologies.
Adequate inputs on a variety of issues in harnessing renewable Energy.
Recognize current and possible future role of renewable energy sources.

UNIT I RENEWABLE ENERGY (RE) SOURCES 9

Environmental consequences of fossil fuel use, Importance of renewable sources of energy,
Sustainable Design and development, Types of RE sources, Limitations of RE sources,
Present Indian and international energy scenario of conventional and RE sources.

UNIT II WIND ENERGY 9

Power in the Wind – Types of Wind Power Plants(WPPs)–Components of WPPs-Working
of WPPs- Siting of WPPs-Grid integration issues of WPPs.

84
UNIT III SOLAR PV AND THERMAL SYSTEMS 9
Solar Radiation, Radiation Measurement, Solar Thermal Power Plant, Central Receiver
Power Plants, Solar Ponds.- Thermal Energy storage system with PCM- Solar Photovoltaic
systems : Basic Principle of SPV conversion – Types of PV Systems- Types of Solar Cells,
Photovoltaic cell concepts: Cell, module, array ,PV Module I-V Characteristics, Efficiency &
Quality of the Cell, series and parallel connections, maximum power point tracking,
Applications.

UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 9

Introduction-Bio mass resources –Energy from Bio mass: conversion processes-Biomass
Cogeneration-Environmental Benefits. Geothermal Energy: Basics, Direct Use, Geothermal
Electricity. Mini/micro hydro power: Classification of hydropower schemes, Classification of
water turbine, Turbine theory, Essential components of hydroelectric system.

UNIT V OTHER ENERGY SOURCES 9

Tidal Energy: Energy from the tides, Barrage and Non Barrage Tidal power systems. Wave
Energy: Energy from waves, wave power devices. Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion
(OTEC)- Hydrogen Production and Storage- Fuel cell : Principle of working- various types -
construction and applications. Energy Storage System- Hybrid Energy Systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to create awareness about renewable Energy Sources and technologies.
Ability to get adequate inputs on a variety of issues in harnessing renewable Energy.
Ability to recognize current and possible future role of renewable energy sources.
Ability to explain the various renewable energy resources and technologies and their
applications.
Ability to understand basics about biomass energy.
Ability to acquire knowledge about solar energy.

TEXT BOOKS:
Joshua Earnest, Tore Wizeliu, ‘Wind Power Plants and Project Development’, PHI
Learning Pvt.Ltd, New Delhi, 2011.
D.P.Kothari, K.C Singal, Rakesh Ranjan “Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging
Technologies”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd, New Delhi, 2013.
Scott Grinnell, “Renewable Energy & Sustainable Design”, CENGAGE Learning, USA,
2016.

REFERENCES
A.K.Mukerjee and Nivedita Thakur,” Photovoltaic Systems: Analysis and Design”, PHI
Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2011
Richard A. Dunlap,” Sustainable Energy” Cengage Learning India Private Limited, Delhi,
2015.
Chetan Singh Solanki, “ Solar Photovoltaics : Fundamentals, Technologies and
Applications”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2011
Bradley A. Striebig,Adebayo A.Ogundipe and Maria Papadakis,” Engineering Applications
in Sustainable Design and Development”, Cengage Learning India Private Limited,
Delhi, 2016.
Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable energy”, Open University, Oxford University Press in
association with the Open University, 2004.
Shobh Nath Singh, ‘Non-conventional Energy resources’ Pearson Education ,2015.

85
EE8711 POWER SYSTEM SIMULATION LABORATORY L T P C
OBJECTIVES: 0 0 4 2

To provide better understanding of power system analysis through digital simulation.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Computation of Transmission Line Parameters
Formation of Bus Admittance and Impedance Matrices and Solution of Networks
Power Flow Analysis using Gauss-Seidel Method
Power Flow Analysis using Newton Raphson Method
Symmetric and unsymmetrical fault analysis
Transient stability analysis of SMIB System
Economic Dispatch in Power Systems
Load – Frequency Dynamics of Single- Area and Two-Area Power Systems
State estimation: Weighted least square estimation
Electromagnetic Transients in Power Systems : Transmission Line Energization

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to
Ability to understand power system planning and operational studies.
Ability to acquire knowledge on Formation of Bus Admittance and Impedance Matrices and
Solution of Networks.
Ability to analyze the power flow using GS and NR method
Ability to find Symmetric and Unsymmetrical fault
Ability to understand the economic dispatch.
Ability to analyze the electromagnetic transients.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

Personal computers (Intel i3, 80GB, 2GBRAM) – 30 nos

Printer laser- 1 No.
Dot matrix- 1 No.
Server (Intel i5, 80GB, 2GBRAM) (High Speed Processor) – 1 No.
Software: any power system simulation software with 5 user license
Compliers: C, C++, VB, VC++ - 30 users

86
EE8712 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS L T P C
OBJECTIVES: LABORATORY 0 0 4 2

To train the students in Renewable Energy Sources and technologies.

To provide adequate inputs on a variety of issues in harnessing Renewable Energy.
To recognize current and possible future role of Renewable energy sources.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Simulation study on Solar PV Energy System.
Experiment on “VI-Characteristics and Efficiency of 1kWp Solar PV System”.
Experiment on “Shadowing effect & diode based solution in 1kWp Solar PV System”.
4 Experiment on Performance assessment of Grid connected and Standalone 1kWp Solar
Power System.
Simulation study on Wind Energy Generator.
Experiment on Performance assessment of micro Wind Energy Generator.
Simulation study on Hybrid (Solar-Wind) Power System.
Experiment on Performance Assessment of Hybrid (Solar-Wind) Power System.
Simulation study on Hydel Power.

Experiment on Performance Assessment of 100W Fuel Cell.

Simulation study on Intelligent Controllers for Hybrid Systems.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand and analyze Renewable energy systems.
Ability to train the students in Renewable Energy Sources and technologies.
Ability to provide adequate inputs on a variety of issues in harnessing Renewable Energy.
Ability to simulate the various Renewable energy sources.
Ability to recognize current and possible future role of Renewable energy sources.
Ability to understand basics of Intelligent Controllers.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

S.No Name of the equipments / Components Quantity Remarks

Required
1. Personal computers (Intel i3, 80GB, 2GBRAM) 15 -
2. CRO 9 30MHz
3. Digital Multimeter 10 Digital
4. PV panels - 100W, 24V 1
5. Battery storage system with charge and 1
discharge control 40Ah
6. PV Emulator 1
7. Micro Wind Energy Generator module 1

87
 Consumabilitys (Minimum of 5 Nos. each)
8. Potentiometer 5 -
9. Step-down transformer 5 230V/12-0-12V
10 Component data sheets to be provided

EE8811 PROJECT WORK LTPC

0 0 20 10

OBJECTIVES:
•To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and literature review
till the successful solution of the same. To train the students in preparing project reports and to
face reviews and viva voce examination.

The students in a group of 3 to 4 works on a topic approved by the head of the department
under the guidance of a faculty member and prepares a comprehensive project report after
completing the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is
evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by
the Head of the Department. A project report is required at the end of the semester. The project
work is evaluated based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by external and
internal examiners constituted by the Head of the Department.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
•On Completion of the project work students will be in a position to take up any challenging
practical problems and find solution by formulating proper methodology.

IC8651 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEM LT P C

OBJECTIVES: 2203

To provide knowledge on design state feedback control and state observer.

To provide knowledge in phase plane analysis.
To give basic knowledge in describing function analysis.
To study the design of optimal controller.
To study the design of optimal estimator including Kalman Filter

UNIT I STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 6+6

Introduction- concepts of state variables and state model-State model for linear continuous time
systems, Diagonalisation- solution of state equations- Concepts of controllability and observability.

UNIT II STATE VARIABLE DESIGN 6+6

Introduction to state model: Effect of state feedback - Pole placement design: Necessary and
sufficient condition for arbitrary pole placement, State regulator design Design of state observers-
Separation principle- Design of servo systems: State feedback with integral control.
88
UNIT III SAMPLED DATA ANALYSIS 6+6
Introduction spectrum analysis of sampling process signal reconstruction difference equations The Z
transform function, the inverse Z transform function, response of Linear discrete system, the Z
transform analysis of sampled data control systems, response between sampling instants, the Z and
S domain relationship. Stability analysis and compensation techniques.

UNIT IV NON LINEAR SYSTEMS 6+6

Introduction, common physical nonlinearites, The phase plane method: concepts, singular points,
stability of non linear systems, construction of phase trajectories system analysis by phase plane
method. The describing function method, stability analysis by describing function method, Jump
resonance.

UNIT V OPTIMAL CONTROL 6+6

Introduction: Classical control and optimization, formulation of optimal control problem, Typical optimal
control performance measures - Optimal state regulator design: Lyapunov equation, Matrix Riccati
equation - LQR steady state optimal control – Application examples.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Able to design state feedback controller and state observer.
Able to understand and analyse linear and nonlinear systems using phase plane method.

Able to understand and analyse nonlinear systems using describing function method.
Able to understand and design optimal controller.
Able to understand optimal estimator including Kalman Filter.
Ability to apply advanced control strategies to practical engineering problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
M.Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, 4th edition, Mc Graw Hill India, 2012
K. Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, 5th Edition, Pearson, 2012.
K. P. Mohandas, “Modern Control Engineering”, Sanguine Technical Publishers, 2006.

REFERENCES:
M.Gopal, Modern Control System Theory, 3rd edition, New Age International Publishers, 2014.
William S Levine, “Control System Fundamentals,” The Control Handbook, CRC Press, Tayler and
Francies Group, 2011.
Ashish Tewari, ‘Modern Control Design with Matlab and Simulink’, John Wiley, New Delhi, 2002.
T. Glad and L. Ljung,, “Control Theory –Multivariable and Non-Linear Methods”, Taylor & Francis,
2002.
D.S.Naidu, “Optimal Control Systems” First Indian Reprint, CRC Press, 2009.

EE8001 VISUAL LANGUAGES AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
To study about the concepts of windows programming models, MFC applications,
drawing with the GDI, getting inputs from Mouse and the Keyboard.
To study the concepts of Menu basics, menu magic and classic controls of the
windows programming using VC++.
To study the concept of Document/View Architecture with single & multiple document

89
 interface, toolbars, status bars and File I/O Serialization.
To study about the integrated development programming event driven programming,
variabilitys, constants, procedures and basic ActiveX controls in visual basic.
To understand the database and the database management system, visual data
manager, data bound controls and ADO controls in VB.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF WINDOWS AND MFC 9

Messages - Windows programming - SDK style - Hungarian notation and windows data
types - SDK programming in perspective. The benefits of C++ and MFC - MFC design
philosophy – Document / View architecture - MFC class hierarchy - AFX functions.
Application object - Frame window object - Message map. Drawing the lines – Curves –
Ellipse – Polygons and other shapes. GDI pens – Brushes - GDI fonts - Deleting GDI objects
and deselecting GDI objects. Getting input from the mouse: Client & Non -client - Area
mouse messages - Mouse wheel - Cursor. Getting input from the keyboard: Input focus -
Keystroke messages - Virtual key codes - Character & dead key messages.

UNIT II RESOURCES AND CONTROLS 9

Creating a menu – Loading and displaying a menu – Responding to menu commands –
Command ranges - Updating the items in menu, update ranges – Keyboard accelerators.
Creating menus programmatically - Modifying menus programmatically - The system menu -
Owner draw menus – Cascading menus - Context menus. The C button class – C list box
class – C static class - The font view application – C edit class – C combo box class – C
scrollbar class. Model dialog boxes – Modeless dialog boxes.
UNIT III DOCUMENT / VIEW ARCHITECTURE 9
The in existence function revisited – Document object – View object – Frame window object
– Dynamic object creation. SDI document template - Command routing. Synchronizing
multiple views of a document – Mid squares application – Supporting multiple document
types – Alternatives to MDI. Splitter Windows: Dynamic splitter window – Static splitter
windows. Creating & initializing a toolbar - Controlling the toolbar’s visibility – Creating &
initializing a status bar - Creating custom status bar panes – Status bar support in
appwizard. Opening, closing and creating the files - Reading & Writing – C file derivatives –
Serialization basics - Writing serializability classes.

UNIT IV FUNDAMENTALS OF VISUAL BASIC 9

Menu bar – Tool bar – Project explorer – Toolbox – Properties window – Form designer –
Form layout – Intermediate window. Designing the user interface: Aligning the controls –
Running the application – Visual development and event driven programming.

Variabilitys: Declaration – Types – Converting variability types – User defined data types -
Lifetime of a variability. Constants - Arrays – Types of arrays. Procedures: Subroutines –
Functions – Calling procedures. Text box controls – List box & Combo box controls – Scroll
bar and slider controls – File controls.

UNIT V DATABASE PROGRAMMING WITH VB 9

Record sets – Data control – Data control properties, methods. Visual data manager:
Specifying indices with the visual data manager – Entering data with the visual data
manager. Data bound list control – Data bound combo box – Data bound grid control.
Mapping databases: Database object – Tability def object, Query def object. Programming
the active database objects – ADO object model – Establishing a connection - Executing
SQL statements – Cursor types and locking mechanism – Manipulating the record set

90
object – Simple record editing and updating.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand and apply computing platform and software for engineering
problems
Ability to study about the concepts of windows programming models.
Ability to study the concepts of Menu basics, menu magic and classic controls.
Ability to study the concept of Document/View Architecture with single & multiple
document interface.
Ability to study about the integrated development programming event driven
programming.
Ability to understand the database and the database management system.
TEXT BOOKS:
Jeff Prosise, ‘Programming Windows With MFC’, Second Edition, WP Publishers &
Distributors (P) Ltd, Reprinted, 2002.
Evangelos Petroutsos, ‘Mastering Visual Basic 6.0’, BPB Publications, 2002.
REFERENCES
Herbert Schildt, ‘MFC Programming From the Ground Up’, Second Edition, McGraw Hill,
reprinted, 2002.
John Paul Muller, ‘Visual C++ 6 From the Ground Up Second Edition’, McGraw Hill,
Reprinted, 2002.
Curtis Smith & Micheal Amundsen, ‘Teach Yourself Database Programming with Visual
Basic 6 in 21 days’, Techmedia Pub, 1999.

EE8002 DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Magnetic circuit parameters and thermal rating of various types of electrical machines.
Armature and field systems for D.C. machines.
Core, yoke, windings and cooling systems of transformers.
Design of stator and rotor of induction machines and synchronous machines.
The importance of computer aided design method.

UNIT I DESIGN OF FIELD SYSTEM AND ARMATURE 9

Major considerations in Electrical Machine Design – Materials for Electrical apparatus –
Design of Magnetic circuits – Magnetising current – Flux leakage – Leakage in Armature.
Design of lap winding and wave winding.
UNIT II DESIGN OF TRANSFORMERS 9
Construction - KVA output for single and three phase transformers – Overall dimensions –
design of yoke, core and winding for core and shell type transformers – Estimation of No
load current – Temperature rise in Transformers – Design of Tank and cooling tubes of
Transformers. Computer program: Complete Design of single phase core transformer

91
UNIT III DESIGN OF DC MACHINES 9
Construction - Output Equations – Main Dimensions – Choice of specific loadings –
Selection of number of poles – Design of Armature – Design of commutator and brushes –
design of field Computer program: Design of Armature main dimensions
UNIT IV DESIGN OF INDUCTION MOTORS 9
Construction - Output equation of Induction motor – Main dimensions – choice of specific
loadings – Design of squirrel cage rotor and wound rotor –Magnetic leakage calculations –
Operating characteristics : Magnetizing current - Short circuit current – Circle diagram -
Computer program: Design of slip-ring rotor

UNIT V DESIGN OF SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 9

Output equations – choice of specific loadings – Design of salient pole machines – Short
circuit ratio – Armature design – Estimation of air gap length – Design of rotor –Design of
damper winding – Determination of full load field MMF – Design of field winding – Design of
turbo alternators -Computer program: Design of Stator main dimensions-Brushless DC
Machines
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand basics of design considerations for rotating and static electrical
machines
Ability to design of field system for its application.
Ability to design sing and three phase transformer.
Ability to design armature and field of DC machines.
Ability to design stator and rotor of induction motor.
Ability to design and analyze synchronous machines.
TEXT BOOKS:
Sawhney, A.K., ‘A Course in Electrical Machine Design’, Dhanpat Rai& Sons, New Delhi,
Fifth Edition, 1984.
M V Deshpande ‘Design and Testing of Electrical Machines’ PHI learning Pvt Lt, 2011.
Sen, S.K., ‘Principles of Electrical Machine Designs with Computer Programmes’, Oxford
and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Second Edition, 2009.
REFERENCES
A.Shanmugasundaram, G.Gangadharan, R.Palani ‘Electrical Machine Design Data
Book’, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., Reprint 2007.
‘Electrical Machine Design’, Balbir Singh, Vikas Publishing House Private Limited, 1981.
V Rajini, V.S Nagarajan, ‘Electrical Machine Design’, Pearson, 2017.
K.M.Vishnumurthy ‘Computer aided design of electrical machines’ B S Publications,2008

92
EE8003 POWER SYSTEM STABILITY L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:

To understand the fundamental concepts of stability of power systems and its

classification.
To expose the students to dynamic behaviour of the power system for small and
large disturbances.
To understand and enhance the stability of power systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO STABILITY 9

Fundamental concepts - Stability and energy of a system - Power System Stability:
Definition, Causes, Nature and Effects of disturbances, Classification of stability,
Modelling of electrical components - Basic assumptions made in stability studies-
Modelling of Synchronous machine for stability studies(classical model) - Rotor dynamics
and the swing equation.

UNIT II SMALL-SIGNAL STABILITY 9

Basic concepts and definitions – State space representation, Physical Interpretation of
small–signal stability, Eigen properties of the state matrix: Eigenvalues and eigenvectors,
modal matrices, eigenvalue and stability, mode shape and participation factor. Small–
signal stability analysis of a Single-Machine Infinite Bus (SMIB) Configuration with
numerical example.

UNIT III TRANSIENT STABILITY 9

Review of numerical integration methods: modified Euler and Fourth Order Runge-Kutta
methods, Numerical stability,. Interfacing of Synchronous machine (classical machine)
model to the transient stability algorithm (TSA) with partitioned – explicit approaches-
Application of TSA to SMIB system.

UNIT IVVOLTAGE STABILITY 9

Factors affecting voltage stability- Classification of Voltage stability-Transmission system
characteristics- Generator characteristics- Load characteristics- Characteristics of
reactive power compensating Devices- Voltage collapse.

UNIT V ENHANCEMENT OF SMALL-SIGNAL STABILITY AND TRANSIENT 9

STABILITY
Power System Stabilizer –. Principle behind transient stability enhancement methods:
high-speed fault clearing, regulated shunt compensation, dynamic braking, reactor
switching, independent pole- operation of circuit-breakers, single-pole switching, fast-
valving, high-speed excitation systems.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Learners will attain knowledge about the stability of power system
Learners will have knowledge on small-signal stability, transient stability and voltage
stability.
Learners will be able to understand the dynamic behaviour of synchronous
generator for different disturbances.

93
 Learners will be able to understand the various methods to enhance the stability of a
power system.

TEXT BOOKS:
Power system stability and control ,P. Kundur ; edited by Neal J. Balu, Mark G.
Lauby,
McGraw-Hill, 1994.
R.Ramnujam,” Power System Dynamics Analysis and Simulation, PHI Learning
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009
T.V. Cutsem and C.Vournas, “Voltage Stability of Electric Power Systems”,
Kluwer publishers, 1998.

REFERENCES
Peter W., Saucer, Pai M.A., “Power System Dynamics and Stability, Pearson
Education (Singapore), 9th Edition, 2007.
EW. Kimbark., “Power System Stability”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, New Jersey,
2013.
SB. Crary., “Power System Stability”, John Wiley & Sons Limited, New Jersey, 1955.
K.N. Shubhanga,“Power System Analysis” Pearson, 2017.
Power systems dynamics: Stability and control / K.R. Padiyar, BS Publications, 2008
Power system control and Stability P.M. Anderson, A.A. Foud, Iowa State University
Press, 1977.

EE8004 MODERN POWER CONVERTERS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Switched mode power supplies
Matrix Converter
Soft switched converters

UNIT I SWITCHED MODE POWER SUPPLIES (SMPS) 9

DC Power supplies and Classification; Switched mode dc power supplies - with and without
isolation, single and multiple outputs; Closed loop control and regulation; Design examples
on converter and closed loop performance.

UNIT II AC-DC CONVERTERS 9

Switched mode AC-DC converters. synchronous rectification - single and three phase
topologies - switching techniques - high input power factor . reduced input current harmonic
distortion. improved efficiency. with and without input-output isolation. performance indices
design examples

UNIT III DC-AC CONVERTERS 9

Multi- level Inversion - concept, classification of multilevel inverters, Principle of operation,
main features and analysis of Diode clamped, Flying capacitor and cascaded multilevel
inverters; Modulation schemes.

UNIT IV AC-AC CONVERTERS WITH AND WITHOUT DC LINK 9

Matrix converters. Basic topology of matrix converter; Commutation – current path;
Modulation techniques - scalar modulation, indirect modulation; Matrix converter as only
94
 AC-DC converter; AC-AC converter with DC link - topologies and operation - with and
without resonance link - converter with dc link converter; Performance comparison with
matrix converter with DC link converters.

UNIT V SOFT-SWITCHING POWER CONVERTERS 9

Soft switching techniques. ZVS, ZCS, quasi resonance operation; Performance comparison
hard switched and soft switched converters.AC-DC converter, DC-DC converter, DC-AC
converter.; Resonant DC power supplies .
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to suggest converters for AC-DC conversion and SMPS
TEXT BOOKS:
Power Electronics Handbook, M.H.Rashid, Academic press, New york, 2000.
Advanced DC/DC Converters, Fang Lin Luo and Fang Lin Luo, CRC Press,
NewYork, 2004.
Control in Power Electronics- Selected Problem, Marian P.Kazmierkowski,
R.Krishnan and Frede Blaabjerg, Academic Press (Elsevier Science), 2002.
REFERENCES
Power Electronic Circuits, Issa Batarseh, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.2004
Power Electronics for Modern Wind Turbines, Frede Blaabjerg and Zhe Chen,
Morgan & Claypool Publishers series, United States of America, 2006.
Krein Philip T, Elements of Power Electronics,Oxford University press, 2008
Agarwal ,Power Electronics: Converters, Applications, and Design, 3rd edition, Jai P,
Prentice Hall,2000
L. Umanand, Power Electronics: Essentials & Applications, John Wiley and Sons,
2009.

GE8075 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS LTPC

OBJECTIVE: 300 3

To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyrights,
Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and Development – the way from WTO
to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property, Industrial Property, technological Research,
Inventions and Innovations – Important examples of IPR.

UNIT II REGISTRATION OF IPRs 10

Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents, Geographical
Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and Abroad

UNIT III AGREEMENTS AND LEGISLATIONS 10

International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement, Patent Act of
India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical Indication Act.

95
UNIT IV DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9
Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and Digital
Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between Unfair Competition and
IP Laws – Case Studies.

UNIT V ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 7

Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Ability to manage Intellectual Property portfolio to enhance the value of the firm.
TEXT BOOKS
V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd, 2012
S. V. Satakar, “Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess Publications, New Delhi,
2002
REFERENCES:
Deborah E. Bouchoux, “Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks, Copyrights, Patents and
Trade Secrets”, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
Prabuddha Ganguli,”Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge Economy”, McGraw
Hill Education, 2011.
Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, The Management of Intellectual Property,
Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.

RO8591 PRINCIPLES OF ROBOTICS LTPC

OBJECTIVES: 3003

To introduce the functional elements of Robotics

To impart knowledge on the direct and inverse kinematics
To introduce the manipulator differential motion and control
To educate on various path planning techniques
To introduce the dynamics and control of manipulators

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS 9

Brief history-Types of Robot–Technology-Robot classifications and specifications-Design and
controlissues- Various manipulators – Sensors - work cell - Programming languages.

UNIT II DIRECT AND INVERSE KINEMATICS 9

Mathematical representation of Robots - Position and orientation – Homogeneous transformation-
Various joints- Representation using the Denavit Hattenberg parameters -Degrees of freedom-Direct
kinematics-Inverse kinematics- SCARA robots- Solvability – Solution methods-Closed form solution.

UNIT III MANIPULATOR DIFFERENTIAL MOTION AND STATICS 9

Linear and angular velocities-Manipulator Jacobian-Prismatic and rotary joints–Inverse -Wrist and arm
singularity - Static analysis - Force and moment Balance.

96
UNIT IV PATH PLANNING 9
Definition-Joint space technique-Use of p-degree polynomial-Cubic polynomial-Cartesian space
technique - Parametric descriptions - Straight line and circular paths - Position and orientation
planning.

UNIT V DYNAMICS AND CONTROL 9

Lagrangian mechanics-2DOF Manipulator-Lagrange Euler formulation-Dynamic model –Manipulator
control problem-Linear control schemes-PID control scheme-Force control of robotic manipulator.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand basic concept of robotics.
To analyze Instrumentation systems and their applications to various
To know about the differential motion add statics in robotics
To know about the various path planning techniques.
To know about the dynamics and control in robotics industries.

TEXT BOOKS:
R.K.Mittal and I.J.Nagrath, Robotics and Control, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,4th Reprint, 2005.
JohnJ.Craig ,Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Third edition, Pearson Education,
2009.
M.P.Groover, M.Weiss, R.N. Nageland N. G.Odrej, Industrial Robotics, McGraw-Hill
Singapore, 1996.

REFERENCES:
Ashitava Ghoshal, Robotics-Fundamental Concepts and Analysis’, Oxford University Press, Sixth
impression, 2010.
K. K.Appu Kuttan, Robotics, I K International, 2007.
Edwin Wise, Applied Robotics, Cengage Learning, 2003.
R.D.Klafter,T.A.Chimielewski and M.Negin, Robotic Engineering–An Integrated Approach, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi, 1994.
B.K.Ghosh, Control in Robotics and Automation: Sensor Based Integration, Allied
Publishers,Chennai, 1998.
S.Ghoshal, “ Embedded Systems & Robotics” – Projects using the 8051 Microcontroller”, Cengage
Learning, 2009.

97
 EE8005 SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C
3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
Construction, principle of operation, control and performance of stepping motors.
Construction, principle of operation, control and performance of switched reluctance
motors.
Construction, principle of operation, control and performance of permanent magnet
brushless D.C. motors.
Construction, principle of operation and performance of permanent magnet synchronous
motors.
Construction, principle of operation and performance of other special Machines.

UNIT I STEPPER MOTORS 9

Constructional features –Principle of operation –Types – Torque predictions – Linear
Analysis – Characteristics – Drive circuits – Closed loop control – Concept of lead angle -
Applications.

UNIT II SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS (SRM) 9

Constructional features –Principle of operation- Torque prediction–Characteristics Steady
state performance prediction – Analytical Method – Power controllers – Control of SRM
drive- Sensor less operation of SRM – Applications.

UNIT III PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS D.C. MOTORS 9

Fundamentals of Permanent Magnets- Types- Principle of operation- Magnetic circuit
analysis- EMF and Torque equations- Power Converter Circuits and their controllers -
Characteristics and control- Applications.

UNIT IV PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS (PMSM) 9

Constructional features -Principle of operation – EMF and Torque equations - Sine wave
motor with practical windings - Phasor diagram - Power controllers – performance
characteristics -Digital controllers – Applications.

UNIT V OTHER SPECIAL MACHINES 9

Constructional features – Principle of operation and Characteristics of Hysteresis motor-
Synchronous Reluctance Motor–Linear Induction motor-Repulsion motor- Applications.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to analyze and design controllers for special Electrical Machines.
Ability to acquire the knowledge on construction and operation of stepper motor.
Ability to acquire the knowledge on construction and operation of stepper switched
reluctance motors.
Ability to construction, principle of operation, switched reluctance motors.
Ability to acquire the knowledge on construction and operation of permanent magnet
brushless D.C. motors.
Ability to acquire the knowledge on construction and operation of permanent magnet
synchronous motors.
Ability to select a special Machine for a particular application.
98
TEXT BOOKS:
K.Venkataratnam, ‘Special Electrical Machines’, Universities Press (India) Private Limited,
2008.
T. Kenjo, ‘Stepping Motors and Their Microprocessor Controls’, Clarendon Press
London, 1984
E.G. Janardanan, ‘Special electrical machines’, PHI learning Private Limited, Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCES
R.Krishnan, ‘Switched Reluctance Motor Drives – Modeling, Simulation, Analysis, Design
and Application’, CRC Press, New York, 2001.
T. Kenjo and S. Nagamori, ‘Permanent Magnet and Brushless DC Motors’, Clarendon
Press, London, 1988.
T.J.E.Miller,‘Brushless Permanent-Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives’, Oxford
University Press, 1989.
R.Srinivasan, ‘Special Electrical Machines’, Lakshmi Publications, 2013.

EE8006 POWER QUALITY L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Causes & Mitigation techniques of various PQ events.
Various Active & Passive power filters.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO POWER QUALITY 9

Terms and definitions & Sources – Overloading, under voltage, over voltage - Concepts of
transients - Short duration variations such as interruption - Long duration variation such as
sustained interruption - Sags and swells - Voltage sag - Voltage swell - Voltage imbalance –
Voltage fluctuations - Power frequency variations - International standards of power quality
– Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Associations (CBEMA) curve
UNIT II VOLTAGE SAG AND SWELL 9
Estimating voltage sag performance - Thevenin’s equivalent source - Analysis and
calculation of various faulted condition - Estimation of the sag severity - Mitigation of
voltage sag, Static transfer switches and fast transfer switches. - Capacitor switching –
Lightning - Ferro resonance - Mitigation of voltage swell.

UNIT III HARMONICS 9

Harmonic sources from commercial and industrial loads - Locating harmonic sources –
Power system response characteristics - Harmonics Vs transients. Effect of harmonics –
Harmonic distortion - Voltage and current distortions - Harmonic indices - Inter harmonics –
Resonance Harmonic distortion evaluation, IEEE and IEC standards.
UNIT IV PASSIVE POWER COMPENSATORS 9
Principle of Operation of Passive Shunt and Series Compensators, Analysis and Design of
Passive Shunt Compensators Simulation and Performance of Passive Power Filters-
Limitations of Passive Filters Parallel Resonance of Passive Filters with the Supply System
99
and Its Mitigation. Fundamentals of load compensation – voltage regulation & power factor
correction.
UNIT V POWER QUALITY MONITORING & CUSTOM POWER DEVICES 9
Monitoring considerations - Monitoring and diagnostic techniques for various power quality
problems - Quality measurement equipment - Harmonic / spectrum analyzer - Flicker
meters Disturbance analyzer - Applications of expert systems for power quality monitoring.
Principle& Working of DSTATCOM – DSTATCOM in Voltage control mode, current control
mode, DVR Structure – Rectifier supported DVR – DC Capacitor supported DVR -Unified
power quality conditioner.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand various sources, causes and effects of power quality issues,
electrical systems and their measures and mitigation.
Ability to analyze the causes & Mitigation techniques of various PQ events.
Ability to study about the various Active & Passive power filters.
Ability to understand the concepts about Voltage and current distortions, harmonics.
Ability to analyze and design the passive filters.
Ability to acquire knowledge on compensation techniques.
Ability to acquire knowledge on DVR.
TEXT BOOKS:
Roger. C. Dugan, Mark. F. Mc Granagham, Surya Santoso, H.WayneBeaty, “Electrical
Power Systems Quality”, McGraw Hill,2003
J. Arrillaga, N.R. Watson, S. Chen, “Power System Quality Assessment”, (New York :
Wiley),2000.
Bhim Singh, Ambrish Chandra, Kamal Al-Haddad,” Power Quality Problems &
Mitigation Techniques” Wiley, 2015.
REFERENCES
G.T. Heydt, “Electric Power Quality”, 2nd Edition. (West Lafayette, IN, Stars in a Circle
Publications, 1994.
M.H.J Bollen, “Understanding Power Quality Problems: Voltage Sags and
Interruptions”, (New York: IEEE Press), 2000.

EE8007 EHVAC TRANSMISSION L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
EHVAC Transmission lines
Electrostatic field of AC lines
Corona in E.H.V. lines

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
EHVAC Transmission line trends and preliminary aspect - standard transmission voltages –
Estimation at line and ground parameters-Bundle conductors: Properties -Inductance and
Capacitance of EHV lines – Positive, negative and zero sequence impedance – Line
Parameters for Modes of Propagation.

100
UNIT II ELECTROSTATIC FIELDS 9
Electrostatic field and voltage gradients – Calculations of electrostatic field of AC lines –
Effect of high electrostatic field on biological organisms and human beings - Surface
voltage gradients and Maximum gradients of actual transmission lines – Voltage gradients
on sub conductor.

UNIT III POWER CONTROL 9

Electrostatic induction in un energized lines – Measurement of field and voltage gradients
for three phase single and double circuit lines – Un energized lines. Power Frequency
Voltage control and overvoltage in EHV lines: No load voltage – Charging currents at power
frequency-Voltage control – Shunt and Series compensation – Static VAR compensation.

UNIT IV CORONA EFFECTS AND RADIO INTERFERENCE 9

Corona in EHV lines – Corona loss formulae-Charge voltage diagram- Attenuation of
traveling waves due to Corona – Audio noise due to Corona, its generation, characteristic
and limits. Measurements of audio noise radio interference due to Corona - properties of
radio noise – Frequency spectrum of RI fields – Measurements of RI and RIV.

UNIT V STEADY STATE AND TRANSIENT LIMITS 9

Design of EHV lines based on steady state and transient limits - EHV cabilitys and their
characteristics-Introduction six phase transmission – UHV.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand the principles and types of EHVAC system.
Ability to analyze the electrostatic field of AC lines
Ability to study about the compensation.
Ability to study about the corona in E.H.V. lines
Ability to understand the EHV cabilitys.
Ability to analyze the steady state and transient limits.
TEXT BOOKS:
Rokosh Das Begamudre, ”Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”– Wiley
Eastern LTD., NEW DELHI 1990.
S. Rao, “HVAC and HVDC Transmission, Engineering and Practice” Khanna
Publisher, Delhi, 1990.
REFERENCES
Subir Ray, “An Introduction to High Voltage Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Private
Limited, 2013.
RD Begamudre, “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”– New Academic
Science Ltd; 4 edition 2011.
Edison,” EHV Transmission line”- Electric Institution, GEC, 1968.

101
EC8395 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LTPC
OBJECTIVES: 3003

To introduce the relevance of this course to the existing technology through demonstrations, case
studies, simulations, contributions of scientist, national/international policies with a futuristic
vision along with socio-economic impact and issues
To study the various analog and digital modulation techniques
To study the principles behind information theory and coding
To study the various digital communication techniques

UNIT I ANALOG MODULATION 9

Amplitude Modulation – AM, DSBSC, SSBSC, VSB – PSD, modulators and demodulators – Angle
modulation – PM and FM – PSD, modulators and demodulators – Superheterodyne receivers

UNITII PULSE MODULATION 9

Low pass sampling theorem – Quantization – PAM – Line coding – PCM, DPCM, DM, and ADPCM
And ADM, Channel Vocoder - Time Division Multiplexing, Frequency Division Multiplexing

UNIT III DIGITAL MODULATION AND TRANSMISSION 9

Phase shift keying – BPSK, DPSK, QPSK – Principles of M-ary signaling M-ary PSK & QAM –
Comparison, ISI – Pulse shaping – Duo binary encoding – Cosine filters – Eye pattern, equalizers

UNIT IV INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING 9

Measure of information – Entropy – Source coding theorem – Shannon–Fano coding, Huffman
Coding, LZ Coding – Channel capacity – Shannon-Hartley law – Shannon's limit – Error control codes
– Cyclic codes, Syndrome calculation – Convolution Coding, Sequential and Viterbi decoding

UNIT V SPREAD SPECTRUM AND MULTIPLE ACCESS 9

PN sequences – properties – m-sequence – DSSS – Processing gain, Jamming – FHSS –
Synchronisation and tracking – Multiple Access – FDMA, TDMA, CDMA,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Ability to comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the present
contemporary world
Apply analog and digital communication techniques.
Use data and pulse communication techniques.
Analyze Source and Error control coding.

TEXT BOOKS:
H Taub, D L Schilling, G Saha, “Principles of Communication Systems” 3/e, TMH 2007
S. Haykin “Digital Communications” John Wiley 2005

REFERENCES:
B.P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, 3rd edition, Oxford University
Press, 2007
H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series – “Analog and Digital Communications” TMH 2006
B.Sklar, Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications” 2/e Pearson Education
2007.

102
GE8071 DISASTER MANAGEMENT LT P C
OBJECTIVES: 3003

To provide students an exposure to disasters, their significance and types.

To ensure that students begin to understand the relationship between vulnerability,
disasters, disaster prevention and risk reduction
To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches of Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)
To enhance awareness of institutional processes in the country and
To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 9

Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Disasters: Types of disasters –
Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc - Classification, Causes, Impacts including social,
economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Differential impacts- in terms of caste,
class, gender, age, location, disability - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters, pandemics,
complex emergencies, Climate change- Dos and Don’ts during various types of Disasters.

UNIT II APPROACHES TO DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9

Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety, prevention, mitigation and preparedness community based
DRR, Structural- nonstructural measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj
Institutions/Urban Local Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stake-holders- Institutional
Processes and Framework at State and Central Level- State Disaster Management Authority(SDMA)
– Early Warning System – Advisories from Appropriate Agencies.

UNIT III INTER-RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DISASTERS AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Factors affecting Vulnerabilities, differential impacts, impact of Development projects such as dams,
embankments, changes in Land-use etc.- Climate Change Adaptation- IPCC Scenario and Scenarios
in the context of India - Relevance of indigenous knowledge, appropriate technology and local
resources.

UNIT IV DISASTER RISK MANAGEMENT IN INDIA 9

Hazard and Vulnerability profile of India, Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation,
Shelter, Health, Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and
Preparedness, Disaster Management Act and Policy - Other related policies, plans, programmes and
legislation – Role of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk
Assessment, Response and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment.

UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES AND FIELD

WORKS 9 Landslide Hazard Zonation: Case Studies, Earthquake Vulnerability
Assessment of Buildings and Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies,
Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies;
Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster
Mitigation and Management and field works related to disaster management.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be ability to
Differentiate the types of disasters, causes and their impact on environment and society
Assess vulnerability and various methods of risk reduction measures as well as mitigation.
103
Draw the hazard and vulnerability profile of India, Scenarious in the Indian context, Disaster damage
assessment and management.

TEXTBOOKS:
Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-13: 978-
9380386423
Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India Education Pvt. Ltd.,
2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
Gupta Anil K, Sreeja S. Nair. Environmental Knowledge for Disaster Risk Management, NIDM, New
Delhi, 2011
Kapur Anu Vulnerability India: A Geographical Study of Disasters, IIAS and Sage Publishers, New
Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCES
Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act , Government of India, New Delhi, 2005
Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy,2009.

GE8074 HUMAN RIGHTS LT P C

OBJECTIVES : 3003

To sensitize the Engineering students to various aspects of Human Rights.

UNIT I 9
Human Rights – Meaning, origin and Development. Notion and classification of Rights – Natural,
Moral and Legal Rights. Civil and Political Rights, Economic, Social and Cultural Rights; collective /
Solidarity Rights.

UNIT II 9
Evolution of the concept of Human Rights Magana carta – Geneva convention of 1864. Universal
Declaration of Human Rights, 1948. Theories of Human Rights.

UNIT III 9
Theories and perspectives of UN Laws – UN Agencies to monitor and compliance.
UNIT IV 9

Human Rights in India – Constitutional Provisions / Guarantees.

UNIT V 9

Human Rights of Disadvantaged People – Women, Children, Displaced persons and Disabilityd
persons, including Aged and HIV Infected People. Implementation of Human Rights – National and
State Human Rights Commission – Judiciary – Role of NGO’s, Media, Educational Institutions, Social
Movements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME :
Engineering students will acquire the basic knowledge of human rights.

104
REFERENCES:
Kapoor S.K., “Human Rights under International law and Indian Laws”, Central Law Agency,
Allahabad, 2014.
Chandra U., “Human Rights”, Allahabad Law Agency, Allahabad, 2014.
Upendra Baxi, The Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

MG8491 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To provide knowledge and training in using optimization techniques under limited resources for
the engineering and business problems.

UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 15

The phase of an operation research study – Linear programming – Graphical method– Simplex
algorithm – Duality formulation – Sensitivity analysis.

UNIT II TRANSPORTATION MODELS AND NETWORK MODELS 8

Transportation Assignment Models –Traveling Salesman problem-Networks models – Shortest route
– Minimal spanning tree – Maximum flow models –Project network – CPM and PERT networks –
Critical path scheduling – Sequencing models.

UNIT III INVENTORY MODELS 6

Inventory models – Economic order quantity models – Quantity discount models –
Stochastic inventory models – Multi product models – Inventory control models in practice.
UNIT IV QUEUEING MODELS 6

Queueing models - Queueing systems and structures – Notation parameter – Single server and
multi server models – Poisson input – Exponential service – Constant rate service – Infinite
population – Simulation.

UNIT V DECISION MODELS 10

Decision models – Game theory – Two person zero sum games – Graphical solution- Algebraic
solution– Linear Programming solution – Replacement models – Models based on service life –
Economic life– Single / Multi variability search technique – Dynamic Programming – Simple
Problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students can ability to use the optimization techniques for
use engineering and Business problems

TEXT BOOK:
Hillier and Libeberman, “Operations Research”, Holden Day, 2005
Taha H.A., “Operations Research”, Sixth Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

REFERENCES:
Bazara M.J., Jarvis and Sherali H., “Linear Programming and Network Flows”, John Wiley, 2009.
105
 Budnick F.S., “Principles of Operations Research for Management”, Richard D Irwin, 1990.
Philip D.T. and Ravindran A., “Operations Research”, John Wiley, 1992.
Shennoy G.V. and Srivastava U.K., “Operation Research for Management”, Wiley Eastern, 1994.
Tulsian and Pasdey V., “Quantitative Techniques”, Pearson Asia, 2002.

MA8391 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS L T PC

OBJECTIVES : 4 0 0 4

This course aims at providing the required skill to apply the statistical tools in engineering
problems.
To introduce the basic concepts of probability and random variables.
To introduce the basic concepts of two dimensional random variables.
To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which plays an
important role in real life problems.
To introduce the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments which plays very
important roles in the field of agriculture and statistical quality control.

UNIT I PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES 12

Probability – The axioms of probability – Conditional probability – Baye’s theorem - Discrete and
continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Binomial, Poisson,
Geometric, Uniform, Exponential and Normal distributions.

UNIT II TWO - DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 12

Joint distributions – Marginal and conditional distributions – Covariance – Correlation and linear
regression – Transformation of random variables – Central limit theorem (for independent and
identically distributed random variables).

UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 12

Sampling distributions - Estimation of parameters - Statistical hypothesis - Large sample tests based
on Normal distribution for single mean and difference of means -Tests based on t, Chi-square and F
distributions for mean, variance and proportion - Contingency table (test for independent) - Goodness
of fit.

UNIT IV DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 12

One way and Two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design –
Latin square design - 22 factorial design.
UNIT V STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL `12
Control charts for measurements (X and R charts) – Control charts for attributes (p, c and np charts) –
Tolerance limits - Acceptance sampling.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:

106
 Understand the fundamental knowledge of the concepts of probability and have knowledge of
standard distributions which can describe real life phenomenon.
Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture and
statistical quality control.
Have the notion of sampling distributions and statistical techniques used in engineering and
management problems.

TEXT BOOKS :
Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., "Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers",
Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.
Milton. J. S. and Arnold. J.C., "Introduction to Probability and Statistics", Tata McGraw Hill, 4th
Edition, 2007.
REFERENCES :
Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning, New
Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
Papoulis, A. and Unnikrishnapillai, S., "Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes",
McGraw Hill Education India, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2010.
Ross, S.M., "Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists", 3rd Edition,
Elsevier, 2004.
Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan, R.A., "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of
Probability and Statistics", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2004.
Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., "Probability and Statistics for Engineers and
Scientists", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2007.

EI8075 FIBRE OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTS LT P C

AIM: 3003

To contribute to the knowledge of Fibre optics and Laser Instrumentation and its Industrial andMedical
Application.

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To expose the students to the basic concepts of optical fibres and their properties.
To provide adequate knowledge about the Industrial applications of optical fibres.
To expose the students to the Laser fundamentals.
To provide adequate knowledge about Industrial application of lasers.
To provide adequate knowledge about holography and Medical applications of Lasers.

UNIT I OPTICAL FIBRES AND THEIR PROPERTIES 9

Construction of optical fiber cable: Guiding mechanism in optical fiber and Basic component of optical
fiber communication, –Principles of light propagation through a fibre: Total internal reflection,
Acceptance angle (θa), Numerical aperture and Skew mode, –Different types of fibres and their
properties: Single and multimode fibers and Step index and graded index fibers,– fibrecharacteristics:
Mechanical characteristics and Transmission characteristics, – Absorption losses – Scattering losses
– Dispersion – Connectors and splicers –Fibre termination – Optical sources: Light Emitting Diode
(LED), – Optical detectors: PIN Diode.
107
UNIT II INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF OPTICAL FIBRES 9
Fibre optic sensors: Types of fiber optics sensor, Intrinsic sensor- Temperature/ Pressure sensor,
Extrinsic sensors, Phase Modulated Fibre Optic Sensor and Displacementsensor (Extrinsic Sensor) –
Fibre optic instrumentation system: Measurement of attenuation (by cut back method), Optical domain
reflectometers, Fiber Scattering loss Measurement, Fiber Absorption Measurement, Fiber dispersion
measurements, End reflection method and Near field scanning techniques – Different types of
modulators: Electro-optic modulator (EOM) –Interferometric method of measurement of length – Moire
fringes – Measurement of pressure, temperature, current, voltage, liquid level and strain.

UNIT III LASER FUNDAMENTALS 9

Fundamental characteristics of lasers – Level Lasers: Two-Level Laser, Three Level Laser, Quasi
Three and four level lasers – Properties of laser: Monochromaticity, Coherence, Divergence and
Directionality and Brightness –Laser modes – Resonator configuration – Q-switching and mode
locking – Cavity damping – Types of lasers; – Gas lasers, solid lasers, liquid lasers and
semiconductor lasers.

UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF LASERS 9

Laser for measurement of distance, Laser for measurement of length, Laser for measurement of
velocity, Laser for measurement of acceleration, Laser for measurement of current, voltage and Laser
for measurement of Atmospheric Effect: Types of LIDAR, Construction And Working, and LIDAR
Applications – Material processing: Laser instrumentation for material processing, Powder Feeder,
Laser Heating, Laser Welding, Laser Melting, Conduction Limited Melting and Key Hole Melting –
Laser trimming of material: Process Of Laser Trimming, Types Of Trim, Construction And Working
Advantages – Material Removal and vaporization: Process Of Material Removal.

UNIT V HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Holography: Basic Principle, Holography vs. photography, Principle Of Hologram Recording,
Condition For Recording A Hologram, Reconstructing and viewing the holographic image–
Holography for non-destructive testing – Holographic components – Medical applications of lasers,
laser-Tissue Interactions Photochemical reactions, Thermalisation, collisional relaxation, Types of
Interactions and Selecting an Interaction Mechanism – Laser instruments for surgery, removal of
tumors of vocal cards, brain surgery, plastic surgery, gynaecology and oncology.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES (COs):
Understand the principle, transmission, dispersion and attenuation characteristics of opticalfibers
Apply the gained knowledge on optical fibers for its use as communication medium and as sensor as
well which have important applications in production, manufacturing industrial and biomedical
applications.
Understand laser theory and laser generation system.
Students will gain ability to apply laser theory for the selection of lasers for a specific Industrial and
medical application.

TEXT BOOKS:
J.M. Senior, ‘Optical Fibre Communication – Principles and Practice’, Prentice Hall of India,1985.
J. Wilson and J.F.B. Hawkes, ‘Introduction to Opto Electronics’, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
Eric Udd, William B., and Spillman, Jr., “Fiber Optic Sensors: An Introduction for Engineers and
Scientists “, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.

REFERENCES:
G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, 1995.
M. Arumugam, ‘Optical Fibre Communication and Sensors’, Anuradha Agencies, 2002.
John F. Ready, “Industrial Applications of Lasers”, Academic Press, Digitized in 2008.
108
Monte Ross, ‘Laser Applications’, McGraw Hill, 1968.
John and Harry, “Industrial lasers and their application”, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
Keiser, G., “Optical Fiber Communication”, McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, 2000.
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101002/

GE8072 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT L T P C

OBJECTIVES: DEVELOPMENT 3 0 0 3

To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of

products and services
To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product
based on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the
hardware, software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive at
the optimum system specification and characteristics
To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to
validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering
customer

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends-
Economical Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to
Product Development Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and
Services - Types of Product Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies
Product Life Cycle – Product Development Planning and Management.

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering -
traceability Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling -
Introduction to System Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System
Design - Interface Design.

UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept
Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification –
Mechanical, Electronics and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design
of S/W Program - Types of Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component
design, Layout and Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and
Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification and Documentation

109
UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9
Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation
Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal

UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus
Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development
processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical,
Embedded and Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property
Rights and Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
Define, formulate and analyze a problem
Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business
Context
Work independently as well as in teams
Manage a project from start to finish

TEXTBOOKS:
Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw Hill,
Fifth Edition, 2011.
John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill,
Eleventh Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:
Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning – Concepts”,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013

110
EE8008 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
The concept of system identification and adaptive control
Black-box approach based system identification
Batch and recursive identification
Computer Controlled Systems
Design concept for adaptive control schemes

UNIT I NON-PARAMETRIC METHODS 9

Non-parametric methods - Transient analysis - frequency analysis - Correlation analysis -
Spectral analysis - Input signal design for identification
UNIT II PARAMETRIC METHODS 9
Least squares estimation – Analysis of the least squares estimate - Best linear unbiased
estimate – Model parameterizations - Prediction error methods.

UNIT III RECURSIVE IDENTIFICATION METHODS 9

The recursive least square method - Model validation –Model structure determination -
Introduction to closed loop system identification.

UNIT IVADAPTIVE CONTROL SCHEMES 9

Introduction – Auto-tuning of PID controller using relay feedback approach – Types of adaptive
control, Gain scheduling, Model reference adaptive control, Self–tuning controller – Design of
gain scheduled adaptive controller – Applications of gain scheduling.
UNIT V MODEL-REFERENCE ADAPTIVE SYSTEM (MRAS) and SELF-TUNING 9
REGULATOR (STR)
STR – Pole placement design – Indirect STR and direct STR – MRAC - MIT rule – Lyapunov
theory – Relationship between MRAC and STR.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand various system identification techniques and features of adaptive control
like STR and MRAC.
Ability to understand the concept of system identification and adaptive control
Ability to understand about Black-box approach based system identification
Ability to get knowledge about batch and recursive identification
Ability to study about computer controlled systems
Ability to design concept for adaptive control schemes

TEXT BOOKS:
T. Soderstrom and PetreStoica, System Identification, Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.
1989
Karl J. Astrom and Bjorn Witten mark, Adaptive Control, Pearson Education, Second edition,
Fifth impression, 2009.
REFERENCES
L. Ljung, System Identification - Theory for the User, 2nd edition, PTR Prentice Hall,
111
 Upper Saddle River, N.J., 1999.
K. S. Narendra and A. M. Annaswamy, Stability Adaptive Systems, Prentice-Hall, 1989.
H. K. Khalil, Nonlinear Systems, Prentice Hall, 3rd edition, 2002.
William S.Levine, “Control Systems Advanced Methods, the Control Handbook, CRC Press
2011.
S. Sastry and M. Bodson, Adaptive Control, Prentice-Hall, 1989

CS8491 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 3 0 0 3

To learn the basic structure and operations of a computer.

To learn the arithmetic and logic unit and implementation of fixed-point and floating point
arithmetic unit.
To learn the basics of pipelined execution.
To understand parallelism and multi-core processors.
To understand the memory hierarchies, cache memories and virtual memories.
To learn the different ways of communication with I/O devices.

UNIT I BASIC STRUCTURE OF A COMPUTER SYSTEM 9

Functional Units – Basic Operational Concepts – Performance – Instructions: Language of
the Computer – Operations, Operands – Instruction representation – Logical operations –
decision making – MIPS Addressing.

UNIT IIARITHMETIC FOR COMPUTERS 9

Addition and Subtraction – Multiplication – Division – Floating Point Representation –
Floating Point Operations – Subword Parallelism

UNIT III PROCESSOR AND CONTROL UNIT 9

A Basic MIPS implementation – Building a Datapath – Control Implementation Scheme –
Pipelining – Pipelined datapath and control – Handling Data Hazards & Control Hazards –
Exceptions.

UNIT IV PARALLELISIM 9
Parallel processing challenges – Flynn’s classification – SISD, MIMD, SIMD, SPMD, and
Vector Architectures - Hardware multithreading – Multi-core processors and other Shared
Memory Multiprocessors - Introduction to Graphics Processing Units, Clusters, Warehouse
Scale Computers and other Message-Passing Multiprocessors.

UNIT VMEMORY & I/O SYSTEMS 9

Memory Hierarchy - memory technologies – cache memory – measuring and improving
cache performance – virtual memory, TLB’s – Accessing I/O Devices – Interrupts – Direct
Memory Access – Bus structure – Bus operation – Arbitration – Interface circuits - USB.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

112
OUTCOMES:
On Completion of the course, the students should be able to:
Understand the basics structure of computers, operations and instructions.
Design arithmetic and logic unit.
Understand pipelined execution and design control unit.
Understand parallel processing architectures.
Understand the various memory systems and I/O communication.

TEXT BOOKS:
David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software Interface, Fifth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 2014.
Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky and Naraig Manjikian, Computer
Organization and Embedded Systems, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

REFERENCES
William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for
Performance, Eighth Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
John P. Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organization, Third Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2012.
John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, Computer Architecture – A Quantitative
Approach‖, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2012.

EE8009 CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL DRIVES L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
To understand the DC drive control.
To study and analyze the Induction motor drive control.
To study and understand the Synchronous motor drive control.
To study and analyze the SRM and BLDC motor drive control.
To analyze and design the Digital control for drives.

UNIT I CONTROL OF DC DRIVES 9

Losses in electrical drive system, Energy efficient operation of drives, block diagram/
transfer function of self, separately excited DC motors --closed loop control-speed control-
current control - constant torque/power operation - P, PI and PID controllers–response
comparison.

UNIT II CONTROL OF INDUCTION MOTORDRIVE 9

VSI a n d C S I fed induction motor drives-principles of V/f control-closed loop variable
frequency PWM inverter with dynamic braking- static Scherbius drives- power factor
considerations– modified Kramer drives-principle of vector control- implementation-block
diagram, Design of closed loop operation of V/f control of Induction motor drive systems.

UNIT III CONTROL OF SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES 9

Open loop VSI fed drive and its characteristics–Self control–Torque control –Torque angle
113
 control –Power factor control–Brushless excitation systems––Field oriented control –
Design of closed loop operation of Self control of Synchronous motor drive systems.

UNIT IV CONTROL OF SRM AND BLDC MOTOR DRIVES 9

SRM construction - Principle of operation - SRM drive design factors-Torque controlled
SRM- Block diagram of Instantaneous Torque control using current controllers and flux
controllers. Construction and Principle of operation of BLDC Machine -Sensing and logic
switching scheme,-Sinusoidal and trapezoidal type of Brushless dc motors – Block
diagram of current controlled Brushless dc motor drive.

UNIT V DIGITAL CONTROL OF DC DRIVE 9

Phase Locked Loop and micro-computer control of DC drives–Program flow chart for
constant constant torque and constant horse power operations Speed detection and
current sensing circuits and feedback elements.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand various control strategies and controllers for AC and DC Motor Drive
systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
Dubey, G.K, Power semiconductor controlled devices, Prentice Hall International New
jersey, 1989.
R.Krishnan,, Electric Motor Drives - Modeling, Analysis and ControlPrentice- Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
Murphy, J.M.D, Turnbull F.G, Thyristor control of AC motors,., Pergamon press,
Oxford, 1988.
REFERENCES
Bin Wu, High-Power Converters and AC Drives, Wiley-IEEE Press
Buxbaum, A.Schierau, and K.Staughen, A design of control systems for DC drives,
Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1990.
Bimal K. Bose, Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives, Pearson Education
(Singapore) Pte. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
R. Krishnan, Switched Reluctance Motor Drives: Modeling, Simulation, Analysis,
Design, and Applications, CRC press, 2001.
Werner Leonhard, Control of Electrical Drives, 3rd Edition, Springer, Sept., 2001.
R. Krishnan, Permanent Magnet Synchronous and Brushless DC Motor Drives, CRC
press, 2001.

EC8095 VLSI DESIGN L T P C

OBJECTIVES: 3 0 0 3

Study the fundamentals of CMOS circuits and its characteristics.

Learn the design and realization of combinational & sequential digital circuits.
Architectural choices and performance tradeoffs involved in designing and realizing the
circuits in CMOS technology are discussed
Learn the different FPGA architectures and testability of VLSI circuits.

114
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOS TRANSISTOR 9
MOS Transistor, CMOS logic, Inverter, Pass Transistor, Transmission gate, Layout Design Rules,
Gate Layouts, Stick Diagrams, Long-Channel I-V Charters tics, C-V Charters tics, Nonideal I-V
Effects, DC Transfer characteristics, RC Delay Model, Elmore Delay, Linear Delay Model, Logical
effort, Parasitic Delay, Delay in Logic Gate, Scaling.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Circuit Families: Static CMOS, Ratioed Circuits, Cascode Voltage Switch Logic, Dynamic
Circuits, Pass Transistor Logic, Transmission Gates, Domino, Dual Rail Domino, CPL, DCVSPG,
DPL, Circuit Pitfalls.
Power: Dynamic Power, Static Power, Low Power Architecture.
UNIT III SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9

Static latches and Registers, Dynamic latches and Registers, Pulse Registers, Sense Amplifier
Based Register, Pipelining, Schmmit Trigger, Monostability Sequential Circuits, Astability
Sequential Circuits.
Timing Issues : Timing Classification Of Digital System, Synchronous Design.

UNIT IV DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS AND SUBSYSTEM 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders, Multipliers, Shifters, ALUs, power and speed
tradeoffs, Case Study: Design as a tradeoff.
Designing Memory and Array structures: Memory Architectures and Building Blocks, Memory
Core, Memory Peripheral Circuitry.

UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGIES AND TESTING 9

FPGA Building Block Architectures, FPGA Interconnect Routing Procedures.
Design for Testability: Ad Hoc Testing, Scan Design, BIST, IDDQ Testing, Design for
Manufacturability, Boundary Scan.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
UPON COMPLETION OF THE COURSE, STUDENTS SHOULD ABILITY TO
Realize the concepts of digital building blocks using MOS transistor.
Design combinational MOS circuits and power strategies.
Design and construct Sequential Circuits and Timing systems.
Design arithmetic building blocks and memory subsystems.
Apply and implement FPGA design flow and testing.

TEXT BOOKS:
Neil H.E. Weste, David Money Harris “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems
Perspective”, 4th Edition, Pearson , 2017.(UNIT I,II,V)
Jan M. Rabaey ,Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje. Nikolic, ”Digital Integrated Circuits:A
Design perspective”, Second Edition , Pearson , 2016.(UNIT III,IV)

REFERENCES
M.J. Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addisson Wesley, 1997

115
Sung-Mo kang, Yusuf leblebici, Chulwoo Kim “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits:Analysis &
Design”,4th edition McGraw Hill Education,2013
Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design: System On Chip”, Pearson Education, 2007
R.Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and
Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India 2005.

EE8010 POWER SYSTEMS TRANSIENTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Generation of switching transients and their control using circuit – theoretical concept.
Mechanism of lighting strokes and the production of lighting surges.
Propagation, reflection and refraction of travelling waves.
Voltage transients caused by faults, circuit breaker action, load rejection on integrated
power system.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SURVEY 9

Review and importance of the study of transients - causes for transients. RL circuit
transient with sine wave excitation - double frequency transients - basic transforms of the
RLC circuit transients. Different types of power system transients - effect of transients on
power systems – role of the study of transients in system planning.

UNIT II SWITCHING TRANSIENTS 9

Over voltages due to switching transients - resistance switching and the equivalent circuit
for interrupting the resistor current - load switching and equivalent circuit - waveforms for
transient voltage across the load and the switch - normal and abnormal switching
transients. Current suppression - current chopping - effective equivalent circuit.
Capacitance switching - effect of source regulation - capacitance switching with a restrike,
with multiple restrikes. Illustration for multiple restriking transients - ferro resonance.

UNIT III LIGHTNING TRANSIENTS 9

Review of the theories in the formation of clouds and charge formation - rate of charging of
thunder clouds – mechanism of lightning discharges and characteristics of lightning strokes
– model for lightning stroke - factors contributing to good line design - protection using
ground wires - tower footing resistance - Interaction between lightning and power system.

UNIT IV TRAVELING WAVES ON TRANSMISSION LINE COMPUTATION OF 9

TRANSIENTS
Computation of transients - transient response of systems with series and shunt lumped
parameters and distributed lines. Traveling wave concept - step response - Bewely’s lattice
diagram - standing waves and natural frequencies - reflection and refraction of travelling
waves.

UNIT V TRANSIENTS IN INTEGRATED POWER SYSTEM 9

The short line and kilometric fault - distribution of voltages in a power system - Line
dropping and load rejection - voltage transients on closing and reclosing lines - over
116
 voltage induced by faults -switching surges on integrated system Qualitative application of
EMTP for transient computation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand and analyze switching and lightning transients.
Ability to acquire knowledge on generation of switching transients and their control.
Ability to analyze the mechanism of lighting strokes.
Ability to understand the importance of propagation, reflection and refraction of travelling
waves.
Ability to find the voltage transients caused by faults.
Ability to understand the concept of circuit breaker action, load rejection on integrated
power system.

TEXT BOOKS:
Allan Greenwood, ‘Electrical Transients in Power Systems’, Wiley Inter Science, New
York, 2ndEdition, 1991.
Pritindra Chowdhari, “Electromagnetic transients in Power System”, John Wiley and
Sons Inc., Second Edition, 2009.
C.S. Indulkar, D.P.Kothari, K. Ramalingam, ‘Power System Transients – A statistical
approach’, PHI Learning Private Limited, Second Edition, 2010.
REFERENCES
M.S.Naidu and V.Kamaraju, ‘High Voltage Engineering’, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2013.
R.D. Begamudre, ‘Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering’, Wiley Eastern
Limited, 1986.
Y.Hase, Handbook of Power System Engineering,” Wiley India, 2012.
J.L.Kirtley, “Electric Power Principles, Sources, Conversion, Distribution and use,” Wiley,
2012.
Akihiro ametani,” Power System Transient theory and applications”, CRC press, 2013.

GE8077 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT LT PC

OBJECTIVE: 30 03

To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and process.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definitions of quality - Dimensions of product and
service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and
Crosby - Barriers to TQM - Customer focus - Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer
complaints, Customer retention.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Quality Statements, Strategic quality planning, Quality Councils - Employee involvement
- Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal -
Continuous process improvement - PDCA cycle, 5S, Kaizen - Supplier partnership - Partnering,
Supplier selection, Supplier Rating.

117
UNIT III TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9
The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six sigma: Concepts, Methodology,
applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT - Bench marking - Reason to bench mark,
Bench marking process - FMEA - Stages, Types.

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality Circles - Cost of Quality - Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function -
TPM - Concepts, improvement needs - Performance measures.

UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-Specific
Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—Implementation—
Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration--ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO 14001—
Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
The student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management to manufacturing
and services processes.

TEXT BOOK:
Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Besterfield,Mary B.Sacre,Hemant Urdhwareshe and
Rashmi Urdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Revised Third
Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice Hall (India)
Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
ISO9001-2015 standards

EE8011 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
The start-of-art of the power system
Performance of power systems with FACTS controllers.
FACTS controllers for load flow and dynamic analysis
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Real and reactive power control in electrical power transmission lines–loads & system
compensation-Uncompensated transmission line–shunt and series compensation.

UNIT II STATIC VAR COMPENSATOR (SVC) AND APPLICATIONS 9

Voltage control by SVC–Advantages of slope in dynamic characteristics–Influence of SVC
on system voltage–Design of SVC voltage regulator–TCR-FC-TCR-Modeling of SVC for
power flow and fast transient stability– Applications: Enhancement of transient stability –
118
Steady state power transfer –Enhancement of power system damping.

UNIT III THYRISTOR CONTROLLED SERIES CAPACITOR (TCSC) AND 9

APPLICATIONS
Operation of the TCSC–Different modes of operation–Modelling of TCSC, Variability
reactance model– Modelling for Power Flow and stability studies. Applications:
Improvement of the system stability limit–Enhancement of system damping.
UNIT IV VOLTAGE SOURCE CONVERTER BASED FACTS CONTROLLERS 9
Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM)–Principle of operation–V-I Characteristics.
Applications: Steady state power transfer-enhancement of transient stability-prevention of
voltage instability. SSSC-operation of SSSC and the control of power flow–modelling of
SSSC in load flow and transient stability studies- Dynamic voltage restorer(DVR).

UNIT V ADVANCED FACTS CONTROLLERS 9

Interline DVR(IDVR) - Unified Power flow controller (UPFC) - Interline power flow controller
(IPFC) - Unified Power quality conditioner (UPQC).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand, analyze and develop analytical model of FACTS controller for
power system application.
Ability to understand the concepts about load compensation techniques.
Ability to acquire knowledge on facts devices.
Ability to understand the start-of-art of the power system
Ability to analyze the performance of steady state and transients of facts controllers.
Ability to study about advanced FACTS controllers.

TEXT BOOKS:
R.Mohan Mathur, Rajiv K.Varma,“Thyristor–Based Facts Controllers for Electrical
Transmission Systems”, IEEE press andJohnWiley&Sons,Inc,2002.
NarainG. Hingorani, “Understanding FACTS-Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC
Transmission Systems”, Standard Publishers Distributors,Delhi-110006,2011.
T.J.E Miller, Power Electronics in power systems, John Wiley and sons.
REFERENCES
K.R. Padiyar, ”FACTS Controllers in Power Transmission and Distribution”, New Age
International (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi, 2008
A.T.John,“FlexibleA.C.TransmissionSystems”,InstitutionofElectricalandElectronic
Engineers(IEEE), 1999.
V.K.Sood, HVDC and FACTS controllers–Applications of Static Converters in Power
System, APRIL2004,KluwerAcademic Publishers,2004.

119
EE8012 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Basics of artificial neural network.
Concepts of modelling and control of neural and fuzzy control schemes.
Features of hybrid control schemes.

UNIT I ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORK 9

Review of fundamentals – Biological neuron, artificial neuron, activation function, single
layer perceptron – Limitation – Multi layer perceptron – Back Propagation Algorithm (BPA)
– Recurrent Neural Network (RNN) – Adaptive Resonance Theory (ART) based network –
Radial basis function network – online learning algorithms, BP through time – RTRL
algorithms – Reinforcement learning.

UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS FOR MODELING AND CONTROL 9

Modelling of non-linear systems using ANN – Generation of training data – Optimal
architecture– Model validation – Control of non-linear systems using ANN – Direct and
indirect neuro control schemes – Adaptive neuro controller – Familiarization with neural
network toolbox.
UNIT III FUZZY SET THEORY 9
Fuzzy set theory – Fuzzy sets – Operation on fuzzy sets – Scalar cardinality, fuzzy
cardinality, union and intersection, complement (Yager and Sugeno), equilibrium points,
aggregation, projection, composition, cylindrical extension, fuzzy relation – Fuzzy
membership functions.
UNIT IV FUZZY LOGIC FOR MODELING AND CONTROL 9
Modelling of non-linear systems using fuzzy models – TSK model – Fuzzy logic controller
– Fuzzification – Knowledge base – Decision making logic – Defuzzification – Adaptive
fuzzy systems – Familiarization with fuzzy logic toolbox.
UNIT V HYBRID CONTROL SCHEMES 9
Fuzzification and rule base using ANN – Neuro fuzzy systems – ANFIS – Fuzzy neuron–
GA – Optimization of membership function and rule base using Genetic Algorithm –
Introduction to other evolutionary optimization techniques, support vector machine– Case
study – Familiarization with ANFIS toolbox.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand the concepts of ANN, different features of fuzzy logic and their
modelling, control aspects and different hybrid control schemes.
Ability to understand the basics of artificial neural network.
Ability to get knowledge on modelling and control of neural.
Ability to get knowledge on modelling and control of fuzzy control schemes.
Ability to acquire knowledge on hybrid control schemes.
Ability to understand the concepts of Adaptive Resonance Theory

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Laurence Fausett, “Fundamentals of Neural Networks”, Prentice Hall, Englewood

120
 Cliffs, N.J., 1992
Timothy J. Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw Hill Inc., 2000.
REFERENCES
Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithm in Search, Optimization and Machine learning”, Addison
Wesley Publishing Company Inc. 1989
Millon W.T., Sutton R.S. and Webrose P.J., “Neural Networks for Control”, MIT press,
1992
Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine learning (Adaptive Computation and Machine
Learning series)’, MIT Press, Second Edition, 2010.
Zhang Huaguang and Liu Derong, “Fuzzy Modeling and Fuzzy Control Series: Control
Engineering”, 2006

EE8013 POWER SYSTEMS DYNAMICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:

Basics of dynamics and stability problems
Modeling of synchronous machines
Excitation system and speed-governing controllers.
Small signal stability of a single-machine infinite bus system with excitation system and
power system stabilizer.
Transient stability simulation of multi machine power system.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basics of system dynamics – numerical techniques – introduction to software packages to
study the responses. Concept and importance of power system stability in the operation
and design - distinction between transient and dynamic stability - complexity of stability
problem in large system – necessity for reduced models - stability of interconnected
systems.

UNIT II SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE MODELLING 9

Synchronous machine - flux linkage equations - Park’s transformation - per unit conversion
normalizing the equations - equivalent circuit - current space model - flux linkage state
space model. Sub-transient and transient inductances - time constants. Simplified models
(one axis and constant flux linkage) - steady state equations and phasor diagrams.

UNIT III MACHINE CONTROLLERS 9

Exciter and voltage regulators - function and types of excitation systems - typical excitation
system configuration - block diagram and state space representation of IEEE type 1
excitation system - saturation function - stabilizing circuit. Function of speed governing
systems - block diagram and state space representation of IEEE mechanical hydraulic
governor and electrical hydraulic governors for hydro turbines and steam turbines.

121
UNIT IV TRANSIENT STABILITY 9
State equation for multi machine system with one axis model and simulation – modelling of
multi machine power system with one axis machine model including excitation system and
speed governing system and simulation using R-K method of fourth order (Gill’s technique)
for transient stability analysis - power system stabilizer. For all simulations, the algorithm
and flow chart have to be discussed.

UNIT V DYNAMIC STABILITY 9

System response to small disturbances - linear model of the unregulated synchronous
machine and its modes of oscillation - regulated synchronous machine - distribution of
power impact - linearization of the load equation for the one machine problem – simplified
linear model - effect of excitation on dynamic stability - approximate system representation
supplementary stabilizing signals - dynamic performance measure - small signal
performance measures.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand and analyze power system operation, stability, control and
protection.
Ability to get knowledge on the basics of dynamics and stability problems
Ability to design and modelling of synchronous machines
Ability to study about excitation system and speed-governing controllers.
Ability to understand the concept of small signal stability of a single-machine infinite bus
system with excitation system.
Ability to analyze the transient stability simulation.

TEXT BOOKS:
P.M. Anderson and A.A.Fouad, ‘Power System Control and Stability’, Galgotia
Publications, New Delhi, 2003.
P. Kundur, ‘Power System Stability and Control’, McGraw Hill Inc., USA, 1994.
R.Ramanujam, “Power System Dynamics – Analysis and Simulation”, PHI, 2009.
REFERENCES
M.A.Pai and W.Sauer, ‘Power System Dynamics and Stability’, Pearson Education Asia,
India, 2002.
James A.Momoh, Mohamed. E. EI-Hawary. “ Electric Systems, Dynamics and Stability
with Artificial Intelligence applications”, Marcel Dekker, USA First Edition, 2000.
C.A.Gross, “Power System Analysis,” Wiley India, 2011.
B.M.Weedy, B.J.Lory, N.Jenkins, J.B.Ekanayake and G.Strbac,” Electric Power Systems”,
Wiley India, 2013.
K.Umarao, “Computer Techniques and Models in Power System,” I.K. International, 2007.

122
 EE8014 SMPS AND UPS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Modern power electronic converters and its applications in electric power utility.
Resonant converters and UPS

UNIT I DC-DC CONVERTERS 9

Principles of step down and step up converters – Analysis and state space modeling of
Buck, Boost, Buck- Boost and Cuk converters.

UNIT II SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERTERS 9

Analysis and state space modeling of fly back, Forward, Push pull, Luo, Half bridge and full
bridge converters- control circuits and PWM techniques.

UNIT III RESONANT CONVERTERS 9

Introduction- classification- basic concepts- Resonant switch- Load Resonant converters-
ZVS , Clamped voltage topologies- DC link inverters with Zero Voltage Switching- Series
and parallel Resonant inverters- Voltage control.

UNIT IV DC-AC CONVERTERS 9

Single phase and three phase inverters, control using various (sine PWM, SVPWM and
PSPWM) techniques, various harmonic elimination techniques- Multilevel inverters-
Concepts - Types: Diode clamped- Flying capacitor- Cascaded types- Applications.

UNIT V POWER CONDITIONERS, UPS & FILTERS 9

Introduction- Power line disturbances- Power conditioners –UPS: offline UPS, Online UPS,
Applications – Filters: Voltage filters, Series-parallel resonant filters, filter without series
capacitors, filter for PWM VSI, current filter, DC filters – Design of inductor and transformer
for PE applications – Selection of capacitors.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Ability to analyze the state space model for DC – DC converters
Ability to acquire knowledge on switched mode power converters.
Ability to understand the importance of Resonant Converters.
Ability to analyze the PWM techniques for DC-AC converters
Ability to acquire knowledge on modern power electronic converters and its applications in
electric power utility.
Ability to acquire knowledge on filters and UPS

TEXT BOOKS:
Simon Ang, Alejandro Oliva,” Power-Switching Converters”, Third Edition, CRC
Press, 2010.
KjeldThorborg, “Power Electronics – In theory and Practice”, Overseas Press, First
Indian Edition 2005.
M.H. Rashid – Power Electronics handbook, Elsevier Publication, 2001.
REFERENCES
Philip T Krein, “ Elements of Power Electronics”, Oxford University Press
Ned Mohan, Tore.M.Undeland, William.P.Robbins, Power Electronics converters,
Applications and design- Third Edition- John Wiley and Sons- 2006
123
 M.H. Rashid – Power Electronics circuits, devices and applications- third edition
Prentice Hall of India New Delhi, 2007.
Erickson, Robert W, “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, Springer, second edition,
2010.

EE8015 ELECTRIC ENERGY GENERATION, UTILIZATION AND L T P C

CONSERVATION 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on the following Topics
To study the generation, conservation of electrical power and energy efficient equipments.
To understand the principle, design of illumination systems and energy efficiency lamps.
To study the methods of industrial heating and welding.
To understand the electric traction systems and their performance.

UNIT I ILLUMINATION 9
Importance of lighting – properties of good lighting scheme – laws of illumination – photometry -
types of lamps – lighting calculations – basic design of illumination schemes for residential,
commercial, street lighting, factory lighting and flood lighting – LED lighting and energy efficient
lamps.

UNIT II REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 9

Refrigeration-Domestic refrigerator and water coolers - Air-Conditioning-Various types
of air-conditioning system and their applications, smart air conditioning units - Energy
Efficient motors: Standard motor efficiency, need for efficient motors, Motor life cycle, Direct
Savings and payback analysis, efficiency evaluation factor.

UNIT III HEATING AND WELDING 9

Role of electric heating for industrial applications – resistance heating – induction heating –
dielectric heating - electric arc furnaces. Brief introduction to electric welding – welding
generator, welding transformer and the characteristics.

UNIT IV TRACTION 9
Merits of electric traction – requirements of electric traction system – supply systems –
mechanics of train movement – traction motors and control – braking – recent trends in electric
traction.

UNIT V DOMESTIC UTILIZATION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY 9

Domestic utilization of electrical energy – House wiring. Induction based appliances, Online and
OFF line UPS, Batteries - Power quality aspects – nonlinear and domestic loads – Earthing –
Domestic, Industrial and Substation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
To understand the main aspects of generation, utilization and conservation.
To identify an appropriate method of heating for any particular industrial application.
To evaluate domestic wiring connection and debug any faults occurred.
To construct an electric connection for any domestic appliance like refrigerator as well as to
design a battery charging circuit for a specific household application.
To realize the appropriate type of electric supply system as well as to evaluate the
124
 performance of a traction unit.
To understand the main aspects of Traction.

TEXT BOOKS:
Wadhwa, C.L. “Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy”, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd, 2003.
Dr. Uppal S.L. and Prof. S. Rao, 'Electrical Power Systems', Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
15th Edition, 2014.
Energy Efficiency in Electric Utilities, BEE Guide Book, 2010
REFERENCES
Partab.H, “Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New
Delhi, 2004.
Openshaw Taylor.E, “Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units”, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd,
2003.
Gupta.J.B, “Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction”, S.K.Kataria and Sons, 2002.
Cleaner Production – Energy Efficiency Manual for GERIAP, UNEP, Bangkok prepared by
National Productivity Council.

GE8076 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING LT P C

OBJECTIVES: 3003

To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values, to
instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights of others.

UNIT I HUMAN VALUES 10

Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for
others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation –
Commitment – Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and
meditation for professional excellence and stress management.

UNIT II ENGINEERING ETHICS 9

Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories.

UNIT III ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9

Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics – A
Balanced Outlook on Law.

UNIT IV SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9

Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational
Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination.

125
UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 8
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be ability to apply ethics in society, discuss the
ethical issues related to engineering and realize the responsibilities and rights in the society.

TEXT BOOKS:
Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCES:
Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts and
Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers”,
Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001.
Laura P. Hartman and Joe Desjardins, “Business Ethics: Decision Making for Personal Integrity and
Social Responsibility” Mc Graw Hill education, India Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, 2013.
World Community Service Centre, ‘ Value Education’, Vethathiri publications, Erode, 2011.

Web sources:
www.onlineethics.org
www.nspe.org
www.globalethics.org
www.ethics.org

MG8591 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT LT P C

3003

OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to study the evolution of Management, to study the functions and principles of
management and to learn the application of the principles in an organization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers -
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations , system and
contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.

126
UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives – setting
objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and Techniques
– Decision making steps and process.

UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization structure
– types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority – centralization and
decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR Planning, Recruitment,
selection, Training and Development, Performance Management , Career planning and management.
UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective communication –
communication and IT.

UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control and
performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be ability to have clear understanding of managerial
functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling and have same basic knowledge
on international aspect of management
TEXT BOOKS:
1. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
th
2. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd., 10 Edition,
2009.

REFERENCES:
Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.
Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
th
Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of Management”, 7 Edition, Pearson
Education, 2011.
Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999

127
EE8016 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDITING L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
To impact concepts behind economic analysis and Load management.
Energy management on various electrical equipments and metering.
Concept of lighting systems and cogeneration.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basics of Energy – Need for energy management – Energy accounting - Energy
monitoring, targeting and reporting - Energy audit process.

UNIT II ENERGY MANAGEMENT FOR MOTORS AND COGENERATION 9

Energy management for electric motors – Transformer and reactors - Capacitors and
synchronous machines, energy management by cogeneration – Forms of cogeneration –
Feasibility of cogeneration – Electrical interconnection.

UNIT III LIGHTING SYSTEMS 9

Energy management in lighting systems – Task and the working space - Light sources –
Ballasts – Lighting controls – Optimizing lighting energy – Power factor and effect of
harmonics, lighting and energy standards.

UNIT IV METERING FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9

Metering for energy management – Units of measure - Utility meters – Demand meters –
Paralleling of current transformers – Instrument transformer burdens – Multi tasking solid
state meters, metering location vs requirements, metering techniques and practical
examples.

UNIT V ECONOMIC ANALYSIS AND MODELS 9

Economic analysis – Economic models - Time value of money - Utility rate structures –
Cost of electricity – Loss evaluation, load management – Demand control techniques –
Utility monitoring and control system – HVAC and energy management – Economic
justification.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand the basics of Energy audit process.
Ability to understand the basics of energy management by cogeneration
Ability to acquire knowledge on Energy management in lighting systems
Ability to impact concepts behind economic analysis and Load management.
Ability to understand the importance of Energy management on various electrical
equipment and metering.
Ability to acquire knowledge on HVAC.

TEXT BOOKS:
Barney L. Capehart, Wayne C. Turner, and William J. Kennedy, Guide to Energy
Management, Fifth Edition, The Fairmont Press, Inc., 2006
Eastop T.D & Croft D.R, Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists,.Logman
Scientific & Technical, ISBN-0-582-03184 , 1990.

128
 REFERENCES
Reay D.A, Industrial Energy Conservation, 1stedition, Pergamon Press, 1977.
IEEE Recommended Practice for Energy Management in Industrial and Commercial
Facilities, IEEE, 196.
Amit K. Tyagi, Handbook on Energy Audits and Management, TERI, 2003.
Electricity in buildings good practice guide, McGraw-Hill Education, 2016.
National Productivity Council Guide Books

CS8391 DATA STRUCTURES LT P C

OBJECTIVES: 3003

To understand the concepts of ADTs

To Learn linear data structures – lists, stacks, and queues
To understand sorting, searching and hashing algorithms
To apply Tree and Graph structures

UNIT I LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – LIST 9

Abstract Data Types (ADTs) – List ADT – array-based implementation – linked list implementation ––
singly linked lists- circularly linked lists- doubly-linked lists – applications of lists –Polynomial
Manipulation – All operations (Insertion, Deletion, Merge, Traversal).

UNIT II LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – STACKS, QUEUES 9

Stack ADT – Operations - Applications - Evaluating arithmetic expressions- Conversion of Infix to
postfix expression - Queue ADT – Operations - Circular Queue – Priority Queue - deQueue –
applications of queues.

UNIT III NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – TREES 9

Tree ADT – tree traversals - Binary Tree ADT – expression trees – applications of trees – binary
search tree ADT –Threaded Binary Trees- AVL Trees – B-Tree - B+ Tree - Heap – Applications of
heap.

UNIT IV NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES - GRAPHS 9

Definition – Representation of Graph – Types of graph - Breadth-first traversal - Depth-first traversal –
Topological Sort – Bi-connectivity – Cut vertex – Euler circuits – Applications of graphs.

UNIT V SEARCHING, SORTING AND HASHING TECHNIQUES 9

Searching- Linear Search - Binary Search. Sorting - Bubble sort - Selection sort - Insertion sort - Shell
sort – Radix sort. Hashing- Hash Functions – Separate Chaining – Open Addressing – Rehashing –
Extendible Hashing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
Implement abstract data types for linear data structures.
Apply the different linear and non-linear data structures to problem solutions.
Critically analyze the various sorting algorithms.

129
TEXT BOOKS:
Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education,1997.
Reema Thareja, “Data Structures Using C”, Second Edition , Oxford University Press, 2011

REFERENCES:
Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald L.Rivest, Clifford Stein, “Introduction to
Algorithms", Second Edition, Mcgraw Hill, 2002.
Aho, Hopcroft and Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson Education,1983.
Stephen G. Kochan, “Programming in C”, 3rd edition, Pearson Education.
Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures in C”,
Second Edition, University Press, 2008

EE8017 HIGH VOLTAGE DIRECT CURRENT TRANSMISSIONL T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Planning of DC power transmission and comparison with AC power
transmission.
HVDC converters.
HVDC system control.
Harmonics and design of filters.
Power flow in HVDC system under steady state.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
DC Power transmission technology–Comparison of AC and DC transmission–Application
of DC transmission–Description of DC transmission system–Planning for HVDC
transmission–Modern trends in HVDC technology–DC breakers–Operating problems–
HVDC transmission based on VSC –Types and applications of MTDC systems.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF HVDC CONVERTERS 9
Line commutated converter -Analysis of Graetz circuit with and without overlap -Pulse
number– Choice of converter configuration – Converter bridge characteristics– Analysis of
a 12 pulse converters– Analysis of VSC topologies and firing schemes.

UNIT III CONVERTER AND HVDC SYSTEM CONTROL 9

Principles of DC link control–Converter control characteristics–System control hierarchy–
Firing angle control– Current and extinction angle control–Starting and stopping of DC link
–Power control –Higher level controllers –Control of VSC based HVDC link.
UNIT IV REACTIVE POWER AND HARMONICS CONTROL 9
Reactive power requirements in steady state–Sources of reactive power–SVC and
STATCOM– Generation of harmonics –Design of AC and DC filters– Active filters.
UNIT V POWER FLOW ANALYSIS IN AC/DC SYSTEMS 9
Per unit system for DC quantities–DC system model –Inclusion of constraints –Power flow
analysis –case study
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
130
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand the principles and types of HVDC system.
Ability to analyze and understand the concepts of HVDC converters.
Ability to acquire knowledge on DC link control.
Ability to understand the concepts of reactive power management, harmonics and power
flow analysis.
Ability to get knowledge about Planning of DC power transmission and comparison with
AC power transmission.
Ability to understand the importance of power flow in HVDC system under steady
state.
TEXT BOOKS:
Padiyar,K.R.,“HVDC power transmission system”, New Age International(P)Ltd.
NewDelhi, Second Edition,2010.
Arrillaga,J.,“High Voltage Direct Current Transmission”, Peter Pregrinus, London,1983.

REFERENCES
Kundur P.,“ Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw-Hill,1993.
Colin Adamson and Hingorani NG,“ High Voltage Direct Current Power Transmission”,
Garraway Limited, London, 1960.
Edward Wilson Kimbark,“ Direct Current Transmission”, Vol.I, Wiley inter science, New
York, London, Sydney,1971.

EE8018 MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Architecture of PIC microcontroller
Interrupts and timers
Peripheral devices for data communication and transfer
Functional blocks of ARM processor
Architecture of ARM processors

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PIC MICROCONTROLLER 9

Introduction to PIC Microcontroller–PIC 16C6x and PIC16C7x Architecture–IC16cxx–-
Pipelining - Program Memory considerations – Register File Structure - Instruction Set -
Addressing modes – Simple Operations.
UNIT II INTERRUPTS AND TIMER 9
PIC micro controller Interrupts- External Interrupts-Interrupt Programming–Loop time
subroutine Timers-Timer Programming– Front panel I/O-Soft Keys– State machines and
key switches– Display of Constant and Variability strings.

UNIT III PERIPHERALS AND INTERFACING 9

2
I C Bus for Peripherals Chip Access– Bus operation-Bus subroutines– Serial EEPROM—
Analog to Digital Converter–UART-Baud rate selection–Data handling circuit–Initialization -
131
 LCD and keyboard Interfacing -ADC, DAC, and Sensor Interfacing.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO ARM PROCESSOR 9

Architecture –ARM programmer’s model –ARM Development tools- Memory Hierarchy –
ARM Assembly Language Programming–Simple Examples–Architectural Support for
Operating systems.

UNIT V ARM ORGANIZATION 9

3-Stage Pipeline ARM Organization– 5-Stage Pipeline ARM Organization–ARM Instruction
Execution- ARM Implementation– ARM Instruction Set– ARM coprocessor interface–
Architectural support for High Level Languages – Embedded ARM Applications.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to understand and apply computing platform and software for engineering
problems.
Ability to understand the concepts of Architecture of PIC microcontroller
Ability to acquire knowledge on Interrupts and timers.
Ability to understand the importance of Peripheral devices for data communication.
Ability to understand the basics of sensor interfacing
Ability to acquire knowledge in Architecture of ARM processors
TEXT BOOKS:
Peatman,J.B., “Design with PIC Micro Controllers”PearsonEducation,3rdEdition, 2004.
Furber,S., “ARM System on Chip Architecture” Addison Wesley trade Computer
Publication,2000.
REFERENCES
Mazidi, M.A.,“PIC Microcontroller” Rollin Mckinlay, Danny causey ,Prentice Hall of
India, 2007.

EE8019 SMART GRID L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES: To impart knowledge about the following topics:
Smart Grid technologies, different smart meters and advanced metering infrastructure.
The power quality management issues in Smart Grid.
The high performance computing for Smart Grid applications

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID 9

Evolution of Electric Grid, Concept, Definitions and Need for Smart Grid, Smart grid drivers,
functions, opportunities, challenges and benefits, Difference between conventional & Smart
Grid, National and International Initiatives in Smart Grid.

132
UNIT II SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES 9
Technology Drivers, Smart energy resources, Smart substations, Substation Automation,
Feeder Automation ,Transmission systems: EMS, FACTS and HVDC, Wide area monitoring,
Protection and control, Distribution systems: DMS, Volt/VAR control, Fault Detection,
Isolation and service restoration, Outage management, High-Efficiency Distribution
Transformers, Phase Shifting Transformers, Plugin Hybrid Electric Vehicles(PHEV).

UNIT III SMART METERS AND ADVANCED METERING INFRASTRUCTURE 9

IntroductiontoSmartMeters,AdvancedMeteringinfrastructure(AMI)driversandbenefits, AMI
protocols, standards and initiatives, AMI needs in the smart grid, Phasor Measurement
Unit(PMU), Intelligent Electronic Devices(IED)&their application for monitoring & protection.

UNIT IV POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN SMART GRID 9

Power Quality & EMC in Smart Grid, Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable
Energy Sources, Power Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid, Web based Power Quality
monitoring, Power Quality Audit.

UNIT V HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING FOR SMART GRID 9

APPLICATIONS
Local Area Network(LAN),House Area Network(HAN), Wide Area Network(WAN), Broad
band over Power line(BPL),IP based Protocols, Basics of Web Service and CLOUD
Computing to make Smart Grids smarter, Cyber Security for Smart Grid.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Learners will develop more understanding on the concepts of Smart Grid and its
present developments.
Learners will study about different Smart Grid technologies.
Learners will acquire knowledge about different smart meters and advanced
metering infrastructure.
Learners will have knowledge on power quality management in Smart Grids
Learners will develop more understanding on LAN, WAN and Cloud Computing for
Smart Grid applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
Stuart Borlase “Smart Grid: Infrastructure, Technology and Solutions”,CRCPress2012.
JanakaEkanayake,NickJenkins,KithsiriLiyanage,JianzhongWu,AkihikoYokoyama, “Smart
Grid: TechnologyandApplications”,Wiley2012.
REFERENCES
VehbiC. Güngör ,Dilan Sahin, Taskin Kocak, Salih Ergüt, Concettina Buccella, Carlo
Cecati, and Gerhard P. Hancke, “Smart Grid Technologies: Communication
Technologies and Standards” IEEE Transactions On Industrial Informatics, Vol.7,No.4,
November2011.
Xi Fang, Satyajayant Misra, Guoliang Xue, and Dejun Yang“SmartGrid –The New and
Improved Power Grid: A Survey” ,IEEE Transaction on Smart Grids,vol.14,2012.
James Momohe “Smart Grid: Fundamentals of Design and Analysis,”, Wiley-IEEE Press ,
2012.

133
EI8073 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION LTPC
OBJECTIVES: 3003

To Introduce Fundamentals of Biomedical Engineering

To study the communication mechanics in a biomedical system with few
examples
To study measurement of certain important electrical and non-electrical
parameters
To understand the basic principles in imaging techniques
To have a basic knowledge in life assisting and therapeutic devices

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING 9

Cell and its structure – Resting and Action Potential – Nervous system and its fundamentals -
Basic components of a biomedical system- Cardiovascular systems- Respiratory systems -Kidney
and blood flow - Biomechanics of bone - Biomechanics of soft tissues -Physiological signals and
transducers - Transducers – selection criteria – Piezo electric, ultrasonic transducers -
Temperature measurements - Fibre optic temperature sensors

UNIT II NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT AND DIAGNOSTIC 9

PROCEDURES
Measurement of blood pressure - Cardiac output - Heart rate - Heart sound - Pulmonary function
measurements – spirometer – Photo Plethysmography, Body Plethysmography – Blood Gas
analysers, pH of blood –measurement of blood pCO2, pO2, finger-tip oxymeter - ESR, GSR
measurements.

UNIT III ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS ACQUISITION AND ANALYSIS 9

Electrodes – Limb electrodes –floating electrodes – pregelled disposability electrodes - Micro,
needle and surface electrodes – Amplifiers, Preamplifiers, differential amplifiers, chopper
amplifiers – Isolation amplifier - ECG – EEG – EMG – ERG – Lead systems and recording
methods – Typical waveforms - Electrical safety in medical environment, shock hazards – leakage
current-Instruments for checking safety parameters of biomedical equipment.

UNIT IV IMAGING MODALITIES AND ANALYSIS 9

Radio graphic and fluoroscopic techniques – Computer tomography – MRI – Ultrasonography –
Endoscopy – Thermography –Different types of biotelemetry systems - Retinal Imaging - Imaging
application in Biometric systems.

UNIT V LIFE ASSISTING, THERAPEUTIC AND ROBOTIC DEVICES 9

Pacemakers – Defibrillators – Ventilators – Nerve and muscle stimulators – Diathermy – Heart –
Lung machine – Audio meters – Dialysers – Lithotripsy - ICCU patient monitoring system - Nano
Robots - Robotic surgery –Orthopedic prostheses fixation.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course students will have the
Ability to understand the philosophy of the heart, lung, blood circulation and
Ability to provide latest ideas on devices of non‐electrical devices.respirationsystem.

Ability to gain knowledge on various sensing and measurement devices of electrical origin.
Ability to understand the analysis systems of various organ types.
Ability to bring out the important and modern methods of imaging techniques and their
134
 analysis.
Ability to explain the medical assistance/techniques, robotic and therapeutic equipments.

TEXT BOOKS:
Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2007.
Khandpur R.S, Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,2nd
edition, 2003
Joseph J Carr and John M.Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, John
Wiley and sons, New York, 4th edition, 2012
REFERENCES
John G. Webster, Medical Instrumentation Application and Design, John Wiley and sons, New
York, 1998.
Duane Knudson, Fundamentals of Biomechanics, Springer, 2nd Edition, 2007.
Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., Health Care Systems, Technology and
Techniques, Springer, 1st Edition, 2011.
Ed. Joseph D. Bronzino, The Biomedical Engineering Hand Book, Third Edition, Boca
Raton, CRC Press LLC, 2006.
M.Arumugam, ‘Bio-Medical Instrumentation’, Anuradha Agencies, 2003.

GE8073 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE LTPC

OBJECTIVES: 3003

To learn about basis of nanomaterial science, preparation method, types and application
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8

Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Engineering-
Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-ultra-thinfilms-
multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic,
Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties and motivation for study
(qualitative only).

UNIT II GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION 9

Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Co-Precipitation, Ultrasonication, Mechanical Milling,
Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation,
Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.

UNIT III NANOMATERIALS 12

Nanoforms of Carbon - Buckminster fullerene- graphene and carbon nanotube, Single wall carbon
Nanotubes (SWCNT) and Multi wall carbon nanotubes (MWCNT)- methods of synthesis(arc-growth,
laser ablation, CVD routes, Plasma CVD), structure-property Relationships applications- Nanometal
oxides-ZnO, TiO2,MgO, ZrO2, NiO, nanoalumina, CaO, AgTiO2, Ferrites, Nanoclays-functionalization
and applications-Quantum wires, Quantum dots-preparation, properties and applications.

135
UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9
X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques, Transmission
Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques- AFM, SPM,
STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 7
NanoInfoTech: Information storage- nanocomputer, molecular switch, super chip, nanocrystal,
Nanobiotechlogy: nanoprobes in medical diagnostics and biotechnology, Nano medicines, Targetted
drug delivery, Bioimaging - Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS), Nano Electro Mechanical
Systems (NEMS)- Nanosensors, nano crystalline silver for bacterial inhibition, Nanoparticles for
sunbarrier products - In Photostat, printing, solar cell, battery.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Will familiarize about the science of nanomaterials
Will demonstrate the preparation of nanomaterials
Will develop knowledge in characteristic nanomaterial
TEXT BOOKS :
1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties
and Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996.
2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale Charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd edition,
Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.

REFERENCES:
G Timp, “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999.
Akhlesh Lakhtakia,“The Hand Book of Nano Technology, Nanometer Structure, Theory,
Modeling and Simulations”. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.

136